JP2021041262A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing an attention degree of a player to a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: electrically-driven accessories 37a1, 37a2 having an open state in which a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area can be held and the game balls enter a right operating port 37B and a closed state in which the game balls flowing down the game area do not enter the right operating port 37; and electrically-driven accessory drive units 37b1, 37b2 that set a state to the open state or the closed state by driving the electrically-driven accessories 37a1, 37a2. After setting the electrically-driven accessories 37a1, 37a2 to the open state, the electrically-driven accessory drive units 37b1, 37b2 set the electrically-driven accessories 37a1, 37a2 to the closed state on the basis of entry of the game ball in the right operating port 37B, thereby releasing the remaining game balls held in the electrically-driven accessories 37a1, 37a2. The machine includes holding amount adjusting means for adjusting the amount of holding the game balls by the electrically-driven accessories 37a1, 37a2.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 38

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board is provided, and the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means) to perform an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery. A gaming machine to be executed is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1). For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the game machine shifts from the normal control state to the game state to a specific control state which is advantageous for the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-074175

However, since the variable winning device pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball flows down the game area, the payout of the game ball becomes monotonous, and as a result, the player's attention to the game decreases. There is a problem of doing it.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the player's attention to the game.

The game machine of the present invention has a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front surface of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area, and an internal lottery when the game ball is entered. A game state transition means that shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery that is executed when the game ball enters the lottery means. It is a game machine provided with a variable winning device that shifts to a state in which a game ball can enter when it shifts to a specific control state, and the lottery means can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and draws. A guide piece having an open state in which the ball enters the means and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter the lottery means, and a guide piece drive for setting the open state or the closed state by driving the guide piece. The variable winning device is equipped with a unit, and has a large winning opening for paying out a predetermined game ball when the game ball is entered, an open state for allowing the game ball flowing down the game area to enter the large winning opening, and a game area. It has a closed state that prevents the flowing game ball from entering, and is set to the open state or the closed state by driving the open / close door located on the downstream side of the flow path of the game ball that has passed through the guide piece and the open / close door. A variable winning drive unit is provided, and the guide piece drive unit releases the game ball held by the guide piece by setting the guide piece in the open state and then the guide piece in the closed state. The machine is characterized by comprising a holding amount adjusting means for adjusting the amount of holding the game ball with the guide piece.

According to the present invention, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Front view of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. Front view of the game board Front view of the game board with an enlarged view of the right operating port and the vicinity of the variable winning device Diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Diagram showing the contents of each counter used in the internal lottery A diagram showing a winning / failing table that stores the values of random numbers that win the jackpot. The figure which shows the distribution table which stored the value of the random number which concerns on the distribution destination of a jackpot type The figure which shows the flowchart of timer interrupt processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the winning process for a working opening The figure which shows the flowchart of a normal process Diagram showing the flowchart of the main process The figure which shows the flowchart of the game time control process The figure which shows the flowchart of the data setting process The figure which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation start processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the display duration setting process The figure which shows the flowchart of the game state transition process The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening and closing process The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening process The figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the voice emission control device and the display control device The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing executed by the voice light emission control device. The figure which shows the flowchart of the production decision processing Diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state, etc. The figure which shows the right actuation opening, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device when the winning / failing result becomes "special deviation result" after shifting to the high probability mode. Front view of the game board in which the vicinity of the right operating port and the variable winning device according to the second embodiment of the present invention is enlarged. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the voice emission control device and the display control device The figure which shows the flowchart of the winning process for a working opening The figure which shows the flowchart of a normal process The figure which shows the flowchart of the game state transition process The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing executed by the voice light emission control device. The figure which shows the flowchart of the game ball counting process The figure which shows the flowchart of the production decision processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the production decision processing at the time of closing After shifting to the high-probability mode, three game balls are transmitted on the board surface of the electric accessory, and the winning / failing result becomes a "special off result", and the waiting time (waiting period) for starting a small hit is ". The figure which shows the right actuation opening, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device when "50" is set. After shifting to the high-probability mode, two game balls are transmitted on the board surface of the electric accessory, and the winning / failing result becomes a "special off result", and the waiting time (waiting period) for starting a small hit is ". The figure which shows the right actuation opening, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device when "50" is set. After shifting to the high-probability mode, three game balls are transmitted on the board surface of the electric accessory, and the winning / failing result becomes a "special off result", and the waiting time (waiting period) for starting a small hit is ". The figure which shows the right actuation opening, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device when "200" is set. Front view of the game board in which the vicinity of the right operating port and the variable winning device according to the third embodiment of the present invention is enlarged. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine The figure which shows the flowchart of the winning process for a working opening The figure which shows the flowchart of a normal process The figure which shows the flowchart of the process for electric service support A diagram showing a right operating port, a variable winning device, and a symbol display device when the winning / fail result becomes a "special loss result" after shifting to the high probability mode and the upper electric accessory lottery is won. A diagram showing a right operating port, a variable winning device, and a symbol display device when the winning / failing result becomes a "special loss result" after shifting to the high probability mode and the upper electric accessory lottery is not won. Front view of the game board in which the vicinity of the right operating port and the variable winning device according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention is enlarged. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the voice emission control device and the display control device A diagram showing a right operating port, a variable winning device, and a symbol display device when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening with a winning / failing result of "special loss result" after shifting to the high probability mode. A diagram showing a right operating port, a variable winning device, and a symbol display device when the winning / failing result becomes a "special loss result" after shifting to the high probability mode and the game ball does not win in the large winning opening. Front view of the game board in which the vicinity of the right operating port and the variable winning device according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention is enlarged. The figure which shows the right actuation opening, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device when the winning / failing result becomes "special deviation result" after shifting to the high probability mode.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
The pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine that is a kind of gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main body rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the front (front side). It has 12 and.

The game machine main body 12 is arranged in front of an inner frame (not shown) supported by an outer frame 11 so that one of the left and right side portions can be rotated as a support side, and both left and right sides. The front door frame 13 is supported by the inner frame so that one of the portions can be rotated forward with one of the portions as the support side, and the front door frame 13 is arranged behind the inner frame. It is equipped with a back pack unit (not shown) that is supported by an inner frame so that it can rotate to.

The game machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) provided at its rotating tip. This locking device has a function of locking the game machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11, and also has a function of locking the front door frame 13 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame. Have. These locked states are released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 14 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

The front door frame 13 has a substantially elliptical window portion 21 provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame, and a window panel 22 fitted in the window portion 21. In the present embodiment, the window panel 22 is made colorless and transparent by glass, but may be formed colorless and transparent by synthetic resin or the like.
Further, the front door frame 13 has a display lamp unit 23 provided above the window unit 21 as a part of light emitting means composed of various lamp units provided around the window unit 21, and a display lamp unit. A speaker unit 24 provided on both the left and right sides of the 23 and outputting sound effects and the like according to the game situation, and an upper bulging portion 25 and a lower bulging portion 26 provided below the window portion 21 are provided. There is.

The upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction and are provided so as to bulge forward together.
The upper bulging portion 25 has an upper plate 25a provided inside so as to open upward, and a push button 25b provided at the center of the upper plate 25a. The upper plate 25a temporarily stores the game balls paid out by the payout device 71 (see FIG. 5) provided in the back pack unit, and moves to the game ball launch mechanism 81 (see FIG. 5) side while arranging them in a row. It has a function to guide. The push button 25b functions as an operating means for executing an expected effect that makes the player expect that the gaming state will be shifted to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player by being operated by the player.
The lower bulging portion 26 also has a lower plate 26a provided inside so as to open upward. The lower plate 26a has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 25a.

Further, the front door frame 13 includes a firing handle 27 as a launching means provided on the right side of the lower plate 26a. The launch handle 27 launches a game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 81 provided below the inner frame toward the game area provided above the inner frame by being operated by the player of the pachinko machine 10. To do. The firing handle 27 changes the firing intensity of the gaming ball to be launched toward the gaming area, that is, the firing momentum, by changing the amount of rotation operation thereof.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 31 has an inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 attached to the surface thereof, and is mounted on the inner frame. The game area described above is formed on the game board 31 so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33. In this game area, substantially the entire area can be visually recognized from the front through the window portion 21.
The inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 constitute a guide rail 34 for the game ball to the game area, and the guide rail 34 is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 81 by the player rotating the launch handle 27. Guide the played game ball to the upper part of the game area.

The guide rail 34 is formed so that its exit portion is arranged on one side of the game area and faces the upper center of the game area. Therefore, the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side as the amount of rotation of the launch handle 27 by the player increases. It shifts to the side of the side. In the present embodiment, the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side portion of the game area.

The game board 31 has a plurality of large and small openings formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing in the game area. Further, the game board 31 includes a general winning opening 35, a central operating opening (first starting ball entry portion) 36, a right operating opening (second starting ball entry portion) 37, and a variable winning device 38 provided in each opening. And has an out port 39. Further, the game board 31 includes a through gate 41 provided on each of the left side of the central portion and the right side of the central portion, a main display device 42 provided on the upper right side, a variable display unit 43 provided in the central portion, and the like. Have. Further, the game board 31 has a large number of nails 44 planted for appropriately dispersing or adjusting the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (roles) such as a windmill in the game area. ing.

Each of the general winning opening 35, the central operating opening 36, the right operating opening 37, and the various winning openings of the variable winning device 38 includes detection sensors 40a to 40d (see FIG. 5) for detecting the entry of a game ball. The detection sensors 40a to 40d are arranged on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the general winning opening 35 is provided with the detection sensor 40a, the central operating port 36 is provided with the detection sensor 40b, the right operating opening 37 is provided with the detection sensor 40c, and the variable winning device 38 is the detection sensor 40d. It has. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40d. The detection sensors 40a to 40d may be any type as long as they can individually detect the winning of the game ball, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be adopted.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 prize balls when a ball enters the general prize opening 35. The pachinko machine 10 pays out three prize balls when the ball enters the central operating port 36 and when the ball enters the right operating port 37. When a ball is entered into the variable winning device 38, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 15 prize balls. The number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls at the operating ports 36 and 37 may be different.

The out port 39 is provided at the bottom of the game area of the game board 31. The game balls that have not entered the various winning openings and the like are discharged from the game area through the out openings 39. Further, the out port 39 includes a detection sensor 40e (see FIG. 5) that detects the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 40e is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. The pachinko machine 10 does not pay out the prize balls when the balls enter the out ports 39, unlike the cases where the balls enter the various winning ports.

Each through gate 41 includes a detection sensor 40f (see FIG. 5) that detects the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 40f is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. The pachinko machine 10 does not pay out the prize balls when the balls enter the through gates 41, unlike the case where the balls enter the various winning openings.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the flow of the game area is continued without flow. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish it from the entry of the game ball into the out opening 39, the entry of the game ball into various winning openings is also referred to as a winning. Further, entering the through gate 41 means that after passing through a gate provided in the game area, the ball continues to flow down the game area without being discharged from the game area. The entry into the through gate 41 is also referred to as winning in the same manner as the entry into various winning openings.

The central operating port 36 and the right operating port 37 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 31. The central operating port 36 is provided so as to open upward so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the ball. The right operating port 37 is provided so as to open to the right so that the game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the ball.

FIG. 3 is an enlarged front view of the game board in the vicinity of the right operating port and the variable winning device.
As shown in FIG. 3, the right operating port 37 has an electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) formed of a substantially flat plate-shaped movable piece having a wavy plate surface on the vertically upper side. ing.
The player hits the right with the maximum amount of rotation of the launch handle 27, and sets the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side of the side portion, the game ball can be guided to the right operating port 37 while avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like.

The electric accessory 37a is provided so as to be inclined so as to descend toward the right operating port 37, and is connected to an electric accessory drive unit 37b mounted on the back side of the game board 31. The electric accessory 37a is set to either a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) or an open state (supported state or guided state) by being driven by the electric accessory driving unit 37b. The closed state is a state in which the right operating port 37 is closed so that the game ball is not allowed to enter the right operating port 37 by retracting the electric accessory 37a toward the inside of the game board 31. In the open state, the electric accessory 37a is advanced toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31, so that the game ball can enter the right operating port 37 and the right operating port 37 is opened. is there.

Here, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, the game ball passes through the electric accessory 37a and falls.
Further, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a and enters the right operating port 37 along the plate surface. Will be done. At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball enters the right operating port 37 over time while being shaken by this plate surface. Become.
Therefore, the game ball cannot win the right operating opening 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, and the game ball cannot win the right operating opening 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state. Can win a prize.

The game board 31 is provided with a right side out port 391 provided on the right side of the electric accessory 37a. The right side out port 391 is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Further, the right side out port 391 has the same function as the out port 39 provided at the lowermost part of the game area of the game board 31. Specifically, the game ball that has entered the right out port 391 is detected by the detection sensor 40e arranged on the back side of the game board 31 after merging with the game ball that has entered the out port 39. It has become like.

The variable winning device 38 drives a large winning opening 38a that opens upward so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, an opening / closing door 38b for opening / closing the large winning opening 38a, and an opening / closing door 38b. It is equipped with a variable winning drive unit 38c.
The player hits the right with the maximum amount of rotation of the launch handle 27, and sets the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side of the side portion, the game ball can be guided to the variable winning device 38 while avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like.

Here, the game board 31 includes a cover 381 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 38. The cover 381 is provided around a transparent (or translucent) transparent panel 381a so that the variable winning device 38 can be seen from the front side, and the transparent panel 381a, and is opaquely formed. It includes a panel 381b (see FIG. 2).
Therefore, the player can visually recognize the variable winning device 38 from the front through the transparent panel 381a and the window portion 21.

The grand prize opening 38a is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. As described above, the large winning opening 38a includes a detection sensor 40d that detects the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The opening / closing door 38b is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 31 so as to close the opening of the large winning opening 38a. The opening / closing door 38b is in a closed state in which the opening of the grand prize opening 38a is closed by advancing toward the window panel 22 and protruding from the game board 31, and is retracted toward the inside of the game board 31. By burying it in 31, it has an open state in which the opening of the large winning opening 38a is opened. Here, when the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening / closing door 38b and flows down to the out port 39 side along this plate surface. I will go. At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening / closing door 38b is formed in a flat shape, the game ball is compared with the case where the game ball flows down along the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a. Therefore, it will immediately flow down to the out port 39 side without taking time.
The variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b to either an open state or a closed state by driving the opening / closing door 38b.

Specifically, the opening / closing door 38b is normally set to a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize. Then, when the shift to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery and the shift to the open / close execution mode is performed, the open / close door 38b is set to the open state in which the game ball can win a prize.
The opening / closing execution mode (specific control state) is a mode in which the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state and a game ball can be inserted into the large winning opening 38a. Further, in the opening / closing execution mode, after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again, it is referred to as one round game.

In the present embodiment, the opening / closing door 38b is formed in a rectangular plate shape and is provided on the game board 31 so as to close the opening of the large winning opening 38a. Then, the opening / closing door 38b advances toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31 to close the opening of the grand prize opening 38a and retracts toward the inside of the game board 31 for the game. By burying it in the board 31, it had an open state in which the opening of the large winning opening 38a was opened.
On the other hand, the opening / closing door may adopt a configuration other than this. For example, the opening / closing door may be formed in a rectangular plate shape and may be provided on the game board 31 so as to be rotatable around one side on the lower side as a central axis. In this case, the opening / closing door rotates toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31 to open the opening of the large winning opening 38a and to rotate toward the inside of the game board 31. It suffices to have a closed state in which the opening of the large winning opening 38a is closed by moving and burying in the game board 31.

As shown in FIG. 2, the main display device 42 includes a main display unit 45 and an accessory display unit 46, and is a segment display or a dot display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. It is configured by arranging a plurality of display devices such as.
The main display device 42 is provided on the game board 31 so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. That is, the main display device 42 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the window panel 22. Further, the distance between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22 is narrower than that of one game ball. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling in front of the main display device 42.

The main display unit 45 is a first result display unit 45a for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the central operating port 36, and the inside performed based on the winning of the right operating port 37. A second result display unit 45b for displaying the result of the lottery is provided (see FIG. 5). The main display unit 45 may further include a round display unit for clearly indicating the number of round games in the open / close execution mode when the open / close execution mode is set (or the open / close execution mode is set). ..

The first result display unit 45a executes the variation display of the pattern triggered by the winning of the central operating port 36, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery is performed based on the winning of the central operating port 36. Display the result of. When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the shift to the open / close execution mode, the first result display unit 45a displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.
The second result display unit 45b executes the variation display of the pattern triggered by the winning of the right operating port 37, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery is performed based on the winning of the right operating port 37. Display the result of. When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the shift to the open / close execution mode, the second result display unit 45b displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the central operating port 36 and the right operating port 37 function as a starting ball entry means for entering the game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. To do.
Further, in the present embodiment, the right operating port 37 functions as a lottery means for inserting a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. The right operating port 37 is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and is in an open state in which the ball is allowed to enter the right operating port 37, and is closed so that the game ball flowing down in the game area is not allowed to enter the right operating port 37. It includes an electric accessory 37a (guide piece) having a state, and an electric accessory drive unit 37b (guide piece drive unit) that is set to an open state or a closed state by driving the electric accessory 37a.

The accessory display unit 46 executes a variable display of the pattern triggered by winning a prize in each through gate 41, and as a result of stopping the variable display, an internal lottery is performed based on the winning in each through gate 41. Display the result of. When the result of the internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the electric service open state, the accessory display unit 46 displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the electric service open state. In this electric service open state, the electric accessory 37a provided in the right operating port 37 is in the open state in a predetermined mode.

In the present embodiment, the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46 are composed of a segment display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device, the organic EL display device, the CRT, and the like. It may be composed of other types of display devices such as a dot matrix. Further, as the pattern to be variablely displayed on the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, and a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed. , Or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed can be adopted.

The variable display unit 43 includes a symbol display device 47 that variablely displays (variable display or switching display) a symbol that is a type of symbol. Further, the variable display unit 43 includes a center frame 48 arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 47. The upper portion of the center frame 48 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front surface side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling in front of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the fall of the game ball. It is composed.

The symbol display device 47 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display. The symbol display device 47 starts the variable display of the symbol based on the winning of the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37. That is, when the symbol display device 47 executes the variation display on the first result display unit 45a of the main display unit 45 and the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, the symbol display device 47 may execute the variation display. The variable display is executed accordingly.
The symbol display device 47 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device such as a CRT.

The center frame 48 includes a first holding lamp portion 49a provided in the lower left area of the symbol display device 47, a second holding lamp portion 49b provided in the lower right area of the symbol display device 47, and a symbol display. It is provided with a third holding lamp portion 49c provided in the upper region of the device 47.

The first holding lamp unit 49a is a portion that displays the number of holdings of the winning game balls in the central operating port 36, and lights up according to the number of holdings. The first holding lamp unit 49a can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the first result display unit 45a and the symbol display device 47.
The second holding lamp unit 49b is a portion that displays the number of holdings of the winning game balls in the right operating port 37, and lights up according to the number of holdings. The second holding lamp unit 49b can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display unit 45b and the symbol display device 47.
The third hold lamp unit 49c is a portion that displays the number of hold of the game balls that have won a prize in each through gate 41, and lights up according to the number of hold. The third holding lamp unit 49c can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display unit 46.
The holding lamp units 49a to 49c may have other configurations such as being displayed as an image on a part of the symbol display device 47 described later.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device.
As shown in FIG. 4, the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is divided into three rows of display areas, and the left symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the right symbol are in each display area in this order from the left. Column Z3 is displayed. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, eight types of symbols consisting of numbers "1" to "8" are arranged in ascending order from the bottom to the top, and "1" is next to "8". It is composed of. In FIG. 4, the center line of each display area is indicated by a alternate long and short dash line.

The symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment) based on the winning of the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37. By starting the variable display of the symbol, the effect for the game round is executed on the display screen G. The effect for this game round is switched from the variable display to the stop display in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. It ends in the state.
That is, the game times means from the start of the variable display on the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 to the display of a predetermined stop result based on the winning of each of the operating ports 36 and 37.

The mode of variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 47 is not limited to this, and is arbitrary. For example, the number of columns of the symbol string, the scrolling direction of each symbol string, the number of symbols of each symbol string, and the like can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbol of each symbol string may be a mode in which a picture and a number are combined, or may be a mode of only a picture, instead of the mode of only numbers.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 5, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a voice emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a payout control device 70 that executes payout control that causes the above-mentioned payout device 71 to pay out the game ball, and a power supply that executes launch control that causes the above-mentioned game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch the game ball. A launch control device 80 is provided, and these devices are mounted on a back pack unit.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 60 includes a board box for accommodating the main control board 61 and the like. The substrate box may be provided with a trace means that leaves a trace when the substrate box is opened, or may be provided with a trace structure that leaves a trace when the substrate box is opened. Specifically, as a trace means, a substrate box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion when separating each case body is provided or peeled off. At this time, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of peeling due to the adhesive layer remaining on the bonding target is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies can be adopted.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61, and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 constituting the MPU 62. Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the ROM 63 and the RAM 64.
In the present embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but they may be individually chipped. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 60.

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information. The ROM 63 has various areas such as a pass / fail table storage area 63a, a distribution table storage area 63b, a reach table storage area 63c, and a display duration table storage area 63d. These areas will be described in detail later.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the ROM 63, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. Is. The RAM 64 has various areas such as various counter areas 64a, a holding ball storage area 64b, and an electric service holding area 64c. These areas will be described in detail later.

The MPU 62 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main control device 60 and a plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the voice emission control device 90. Further, the output port of the MPU 62 includes an electric accessory drive unit 37b for opening and closing the electric accessory 37a of the right operating port 37, a variable winning drive unit 38c for opening and closing the opening / closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38, and a main display. It is connected to the unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46.

The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric service open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to open and close the electric accessory drive 37a. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c to open / close the large winning opening 38a. Further, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 45 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the respective operating ports 36 and 37. Further, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 46 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41.

The power failure monitoring board 65 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply / launch control device 80 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts output from the power supply / launch control device 80. .. Therefore, the MPU 62 receives power via the power failure monitoring board 65.
The detection sensors 40a to 40f correspond one-to-one to the general winning opening 35, the central operating opening 36, the right operating opening 37, various winning openings of the variable winning device 38, the out opening 39, and each through gate 41. It is provided. Based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40f, the MPU 62 makes a winning determination (ball entry determination) for various winning openings, out openings 39, and each through gate 41. The MPU 62 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination of the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37.

The payout control device 70 executes payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls and rental balls (game balls to be lent to the player during a game) based on a command (control command) transmitted from the main control device 60. To do.

The power supply / launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a playground or the like. Then, the power supply / emission control device 80 generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 61, the payout control device 70, and the like based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, and the generated operation. Supply power. The power supply / emission control device 80 includes a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor. The power supply unit for power failure supplies power for storage and holding to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

Further, the power supply / launch control device 80 executes launch control for launching the game ball to the game ball launch mechanism 81. Here, the game ball launch mechanism 81 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeding device that supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 25a onto the launch rail, and a launch rail. It is provided with a solenoid, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34 toward the guide rail 34. When the predetermined firing conditions are satisfied, the power supply / firing control device 80 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to the solenoid to launch the game ball.

<Electrical configuration for executing an internal lottery in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60>
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used in the internal lottery.
As shown in FIG. 6, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery or the like by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4. Specifically, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the lottery for generating jackpots, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the lottery for the jackpot type when a jackpot occurs, and draws whether or not to generate reach display. The reach random number counter C3 is used for. Further, the MPU 62 uses the random number initial value counter CINI for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the variable type counter CS for determining the display duration in the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47. Further, the MPU 62 uses the electric accessory opening counter C4 for a lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the right operating port 37 is set to the electric service open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 64a (see FIG. 5) of the RAM 64.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, the counter returns to 0. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. Among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b (see FIG. 5) provided as the acquisition information storage means. Further, among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is stored in the electric service holding area 64c (see FIG. 5) of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in each through gate 41. Will be done.

The holding ball storage area 64b includes a holding area Ra for the first result display unit, a holding area Rb for the second result display unit, and an execution area AE.

The first result display unit holding area Ra provided as the first acquired information storage means includes four storage areas of the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4. Each area Ra1 to Ra4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses the set of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as hold information in time series in each area Ra1 to Ra4 according to the winning of the game ball to the central operating port 36. Store it. Specifically, the MPU 62 holds information in the order of 1st area Ra1 → 2nd area Ra2 → 3rd area Ra3 → 4th area Ra4 when winning a prize in the central operating port 36 occurs a plurality of times in succession. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the holding area Ra for the first result display unit includes four storage areas, up to four winning balls for the central operating port 36 are held. Further, the hold area Ra for the first result display unit includes a storage area for writing the number of holds stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4.
The number of holdings related to the central operating port 36 is not limited to 4, but may be arbitrary, may be 2, 3, or 5 or more, and may be a single number. You may.

The second result display unit holding area Rb provided as the second acquired information storage means includes four storage areas of the first area Rb1 to the fourth area Rb4. Each area Rb1 to Rb4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses the set of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as hold information in time series in each area Rb1 to Rb4 according to the winning of the game ball to the right operating port 37. Store it. Specifically, the MPU 62 holds information in the order of 1st area Rb1 → 2nd area Rb2 → 3rd area Rb3 → 4th area Rb4 when winning a prize in the right operating port 37 occurs a plurality of times in succession. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the holding area Rb for the second result display unit includes four storage areas, up to four winning balls for the right operating port 37 are held. Further, the hold area Rb for the second result display unit includes a storage area for writing the number of holds stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4.
The number of holdings related to the right operating port 37 is not limited to 4, but may be arbitrary, may be 2, 3, or 5 or more, and may be a single number. You may.

When the execution area AE starts the variable display of the result display units 45a and 45b, the execution area AE stores the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. It is an area for moving.

The electric service holding area 64c includes four storage areas like the holding area Ra for the first result display unit and the holding area Rb for the second result display unit. Therefore, up to four winning balls for each through gate 41 are reserved.
The number of reserved pieces related to each through gate 41 is not limited to 4, but may be arbitrary, may be 2, 3, or 5 or more, and may be a single number. You may.

<Detailed explanation of each counter>
The details of each counter will be described below.
First, the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 becomes a loop counter that loops in the range of 0 to 250 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 250, and then returning to 0. ing.
The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the electric service holding area 64c of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in each through gate 41. To.
Then, the MPU 62 draws a lottery (electric combination) as to whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the right operating port 37 is set to the electric service open state based on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 64c. Execute the open lottery).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of support modes in which the frequency of winning a game ball into the right operating port 37 is different from each other by setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a low frequency support mode (low frequency guide state) in which the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a in the open state is relatively low, and a frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a in the open state. It has a relatively high frequency support mode (high frequency guide state).

In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state is the same (for example, both are 4/5) in the electric accessory open lottery. However, in the high-frequency support mode, as compared with the low-frequency support mode, when the electric accessory 37a is won in the open state, the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state more often, and the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state. The opening time for one time is also longer. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state during each opening in the one-time electric service open state is shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode has a minimum secured time (role) that is secured as the minimum waiting time from the end of the electric accessory opening lottery to the next electric accessory opening lottery. The duration of one variable display on the physical display unit 46) is shortened.

Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the game ball is more likely to win the right operating port 37 as compared with the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the player strikes the launch handle 27 to the left with a medium rotational operation amount, and the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed at the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area. By shifting from the side of the side to the center, the probability of winning the central operating port 36 can be higher than that of the right operating port 37. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the player strikes right with the maximum amount of rotation of the launch handle 27, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is set on the side portion where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed. By shifting from the side to the side of the opposite side, it is possible to increase the probability of winning the right operating port 37 rather than the central operating port 36.
Then, when a prize is detected in the right operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of game balls so much. It can be carried out.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is likely to cause the game ball to enter the central operating port 36, and is unlikely to cause the game ball to enter the right operating port 37 (the first left-handed route). 1 route) and a right-handed route (second route) that makes it easy to generate a game ball into the right operating port 37 and difficult to generate a game ball into the central operating port 36. There is.

The configuration of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode is not limited to this. For example, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery as compared with the low-frequency support mode. Further, for example, a plurality of types of securing times may be prepared, and the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that a shorter securing time can be easily selected as compared with the low-frequency support mode. May be configured to be shorter. Further, by combining the conditions of the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time, the high frequency support mode sets the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state to the low frequency support mode. It may be configured to be relatively high as compared with.

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 599, and then returning to 0. .. Further, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value every time it loops once. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599, like the jackpot random number counter C1.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is set in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37. Stored in. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the central operating port 36, and the game ball wins in the right operating port 37. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery for generating a big hit (win / fail lottery) based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a winning / failing table in which the values of random numbers that win the jackpot occurrence are stored.
Among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the random number that wins the jackpot is determined in the hit / miss table storage area 63a (see FIG. 5) of the ROM 63 provided as the hit / miss information group storage means, as shown in FIG. It is stored as (win / fail information group).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has two winning / losing lottery modes: a low-probability mode (low-probability state) in which it is difficult to win a big hit, and a high-probability mode (high-probability state) in which a big hit is easy to win. .. The hit / fail tables are the hit / miss table for the low probability mode (low probability hit / miss information group) shown in FIG. 7A and the hit / miss table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 7B (high probability hit / miss information). Group) and.
The MPU 62 executes a lottery for generating a jackpot by comparing these hit / fail tables with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

These winning / failing tables have the results (winning / failing results) of a plurality of jackpot occurrences of "big hit winning", "special losing result", and "normal losing result".
Specifically, under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 7A, the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit winning" is two. The value of the random number that becomes the "special deviation result" is two, and the value of the random number that becomes the "normal deviation result" is another value. Therefore, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit, the probability that the winning / failing result becomes the "big hit winning" and the "special losing result" is 1/300, respectively. The probability that the pass / fail result will be a "normally out of order result" is 298/300.

On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery for generating a big hit, as shown in FIG. 7B, the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit winning" is 21. The value of the random number that becomes the "normal deviation result" is 28, and the value of the random number that becomes the "special deviation result" is another value. Therefore, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit, the probability that the winning / failing result will be "big hit winning" is about 1/30, and the winning / failing result is "special loss". The probability of becoming a "result" is about 11/12, and the probability of a winning / failing result becoming a "normally wrong result" is about 1/20.

The value and number of random numbers stored in each winning / failing table are arbitrary, and the high-probability mode may have a higher probability of winning a big hit than the low-probability mode. In addition, the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit" stored in the win / loss table for the high probability mode does not include the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit" stored in the win / loss table for the low probability mode. It may also include a part of the random number values that are stored in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode and become the "big hit winning".

In addition, in each winning / losing lottery mode, except for the value of the random number that is the "big hit winning", the big hit is not won and the result is lost.
Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of deviation results, a "special deviation result (small hit result)" and a "normal deviation result". All of these out-of-order results are common in that they do not trigger a transition to the win / fail lottery mode or the support mode. However, the "special deviation result" is different in that it does not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode, whereas the "normal deviation result" does not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 29, and then returning to 0. ..
The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is set in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37. Stored in. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the central operating port 36, and the game ball wins in the right operating port 37. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (sorting lottery) of the jackpot type when a jackpot occurs, based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a distribution table in which the values of random numbers related to the distribution destinations of the jackpot types are stored.
As shown in FIG. 8, the random number values related to the distribution destinations of the jackpot types are distributed in the distribution table storage area 63b (see FIG. 5) of the ROM 63 provided as the distribution information group storage means. It is stored as a minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 8 (a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 8 (b). ing.
The MPU 62 executes a lottery of the jackpot type by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The first distribution table is based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the hold area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning of the central operating port 36. This is a table that is referred to when a lottery of the type of jackpot is performed.
As shown in FIG. 8A, the first distribution table includes "low probability result (special distribution result corresponding to low probability)" and "explicit small round high probability result (high probability result corresponding to small round)". , And a plurality of distribution results of "most advantageous result (special distribution result corresponding to high probability)" are set as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" are distributed to "low probability results", and "10 to 19" are assigned to "explicit small rounds". "High probability results" are assigned, and "20-29" are assigned to "most advantageous results".

The second distribution table is based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the holding area Rb for the second result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning of the right operating port 37. This is a table that is referred to when a lottery of the type of jackpot is performed.
As shown in FIG. 8B, the second distribution table has two distribution results, the “low probability result” and the “most advantageous result”, as the distribution destinations. Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" are distributed to "low probability results", and "10 to 29" are "most advantageous results". ".

Each distribution result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Win / fail lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode (2) Support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode (3) Mode of open / close control of the variable winning device 38 in the open / close execution mode

First, the difference in the winning / failing lottery mode of (1) will be described.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. This low-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery.
The "explicit small round high probability result" and the "most advantageous result" are distribution results in which the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. This high-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery.

Next, the difference in the support mode of (2) will be described.
The “low probability result” is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode regardless of the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode. This high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of game rounds reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times).

The "explicit small round high accuracy result" and the "most advantageous result" are distribution results in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode regardless of the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode. This high-frequency support mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery.

The difference in the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 38 in the opening / closing execution mode of (3) will be described in detail later.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 238, and then returning to 0. ..
The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is set in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37. Stored in. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in the central operating port 36, and the game ball wins in the right operating port 37. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (reach generation lottery) as to whether or not to generate the reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The reach display is an expected effect that occurs when the result is a "normal loss result" without being a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery.
Specifically, the MPU 62 is the value of the reach table and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b when the result is a "normal loss result" without being a "big hit" in the winning / losing lottery. By comparing with and, a lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display is executed, and when the reach display is generated in this lottery, the reach display is generated. The reach table is a table that stores the value of a random number related to the occurrence of the reach display, and is stored in the reach table storage area 63c (see FIG. 5) of the ROM 63.

Here, when the winning / failing lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution lottery is assigned to the "most advantageous result", the symbol display device 47 stops the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result. The combination of symbols having the number of is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. In addition, when the result is a "big hit" in the winning / losing lottery and the result is "low probability result" in the sorting lottery, the symbol display device 47 is a combination of symbols having the same even number as a stop result. Is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Furthermore, if the winning / losing lottery is a "big hit" and the lottery is divided into "explicit small round high probability results", or if the winning / losing lottery is not a "big hit" but a "special loss result". In that case, the symbol display device 47 has different numbers that are not selected when the result of the stop is not a combination of symbols having the same number but a "normally out-of-order result" in the winning / failing lottery. The combination of special symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective line L.

The reach display is when the combination of symbols having the same number is finally stopped and displayed (it becomes a "big hit win" in the winning / failing lottery, and it is divided into the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result" in the distribution lottery. In the case of), it occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the reach display is when the combination of special symbols is finally stopped and displayed (when it becomes a "big hit win" in the winning / losing lottery and is distributed to the "explicit small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, or In the case of a "special loss result" without a "big hit" in the win / fail lottery), it does not occur regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

In the reach display mode, a part of the symbol rows (for example, the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3) among the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is placed on the effective line L. By displaying the stop, the same combination of symbols is displayed to suggest the stop result, and the remaining symbol sequence (for example, symbol sequence Z2) is displayed in a variable manner in that state.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit winner" in the winning / losing lottery after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 47 by generating the reach display and before displaying the predetermined stop result. It is possible to make the player expect that the result is divided into "low probability result" or "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery.

The reach display mode is not limited to this, and after stopping and displaying a part of the symbol strings, the remaining symbol strings are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background. Alternatively, each symbol string may be reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like may be displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has an expected effect as a kind of variable display of the symbol display device 47. The expected effect is to make the player expect that the winning / losing lottery will be a "big hit" after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 47 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed. Refers to the production. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of expected effects, the reach display and the notice display described above.

The notice display will not be a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery if it becomes a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery, or if it becomes a "special loss result" without becoming a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery. This is an expected production that makes it easier to generate the production than when the result is "normally out of order". This notice display may make it easier to select an effect having a low appearance rate, or may combine these, instead of making it easier to generate the effect.
The lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display was executed by the main control device 60, whereas the lottery for whether or not to generate the notice display is executed by the voice emission control device 90. ..

In the mode of the notice display, among the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variablely displayed, and a part of the symbol rows (for example, In a situation where the symbol sequence Z1) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L and a plurality of symbol sequences (for example, symbol sequences Z2 and Z3) are displayed in a variable manner or a reach display is generated, a predetermined character is displayed. Etc. are displayed on the display screen G as a moving image. This notice display occurs in both the case where the reach display is generated and the case where the reach display is not generated, but it is set so that it is more likely to occur when the reach display is generated than when the reach display is not generated. Has been done.
The notice display is not limited to this, and for example, the background may be changed and the notice display may be displayed by changing the form of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

Finally, the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 198, and then returning to 0. ..
The variation type counter CS is updated at least once for each execution of the normal processing described later, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time the update is performed.
Then, the MPU 62 determines the display duration of the symbol on the main display unit 45 and the display duration of the symbol on the symbol display device 47 based on the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer.

<About various processes executed by the main controller 60>
The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing for advancing the game, and main processing that is activated when the power is turned on. Hereinafter, timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing will be described in order.
The MPU 62 executes timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, as well as NMI interrupt processing that is activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but the description of this processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing.
In the timer interrupt process, the MPU 62 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes steps S101 to S105, as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 62 executes the reading process of the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the states of the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f, determines the states, and stores them in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. When the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensors 40a to 40d corresponding to the various winning openings have detected the winning of the game ball, the MPU 62 sets a prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize ball, and this setting is made. The command is transmitted to the payout control device 70. For example, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the variable winning device 38 has detected the winning of the game ball, the MPU 62 is a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls, which is a specific unit number. Is transmitted to the payout control device 70.
The payout control device 70 performs payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out the prize balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62.

In step S102, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI by adding 1 to the previous value, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 64. To do. If the MPU 62 reaches the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI is returned to 0 and cleared.

In step S103, the MPU 62 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 is updated by adding 1 to the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, respectively. The latter value is stored in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 64. If the MPU 62 reaches the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous values of the counters C1 to C4, the values of the counters C1 to C4 are returned to 0 and cleared.

In step S104, the MPU 62 executes a winning process for thru. In this through winning process, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40f corresponding to each through gate 41 has detected the winning of the game ball, the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S103. The value of is stored in the electric service holding area 64c. Further, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the third hold lamp unit 49c, and transmits the set command to the voice emission control device 90.
The voice emission control device 90 turns on the third hold lamp unit 49c based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62. Further, as described above, the maximum number of reserved game balls that have won the through gate 41 is four, and the third reserved lamp unit 49c is lit by the number corresponding to the reserved number.

In step S105, the MPU 62 executes a winning process for the operating port.
Hereinafter, the winning process for the operating port will be described in detail.

<Prize processing for operating port>
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a winning process for the operating port.
In the winning process for the actuation port, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S209 as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the detection sensor 40b corresponding to the central operating port 36 has detected the winning of the game ball, thereby determining whether or not the game ball has won the central operating port 36 (starting winning). Is determined.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has won a prize in the central operating port 36, in step S202, the MPU 62 grasps the number of holdings stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit, and holds the holding. The number is set as the first start hold storage number RaN in a predetermined storage area in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S207.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has not won the central operating port 36, in step S203, the detection sensor 40c corresponding to the right operating port 37 wins the game ball. By determining whether or not is detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the right operating port 37.
When it is determined in step S203 that the game ball has not won a prize in the right operating port 37, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating port. Further, when it is determined in step S203 that the game ball has won a prize in the right operating port 37, the MPU 62 grasps the number of holdings stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit in step S204. The reserved number is set as the second start reserved storage number RbN in a predetermined storage area in the reserved area Rb for the second result display unit.

In step S205, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the winning / failing lottery mode is not the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S207.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process of the right operating port in step S206. In the closing execution process of the right operating port, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a in the closed state. In other words, in the high probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state when the electric accessory opening lottery is won, and then electricly operates based on the entry of the game ball into the right operating port 37. The accessory 37a is set to the closed state. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S207.

After executing the process of step S202 or step S206, or when it is determined in step S205 that the winning / losing lottery mode is not the high probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the start hold in step S202 or step S204 in step S207. It is determined whether or not the storage number N (RaN or RbN) is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment).
When the MPU 62 determines in step S207 that the start hold storage number N is not less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating port. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S207 that the start hold storage number N is less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 updates by adding 1 to the value of the start hold storage number N in step S208.

In step S209, the MPU 62 sets each value set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process in the free storage area of the hold area for the result display unit. It is stored as hold information in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the start hold storage number N updated in step S208.

For example, when the first start hold storage number RaN is set in step S202, the MPU 62 has each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt processing. The set of values is stored as hold information in the first storage area of the free storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start hold storage number RaN updated in step S208. For example, when the first start hold storage number RaN is set to "3" in step S202, the MPU 62 is in the storage area corresponding to "4" of the first start hold storage number RaN updated in step S208. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Ra4.

Further, for example, when the second start hold storage number RbN is set in step S204, the MPU 62 has a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of timer interrupt processing. The set of each value of is stored as hold information in the first storage area of the free storage area of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold storage number RbN updated in step S208. To do. For example, when the second start hold storage number RbN is set to "3" in step S204, the MPU 62 is in the storage area corresponding to "4" of the second start hold storage number RbN updated in step S208. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Rb4.

Further, in step S209, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the first hold lamp unit 49a or the second hold lamp unit 49b, and transmits this set command to the voice emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating port.
The voice emission control device 90 turns on the first hold lamp unit 49a or the second hold lamp unit 49b based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62. Further, as described above, the maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37 is four, and the first holding lamp unit 49a or the second holding lamp unit 49b is the number of holdings. And the corresponding number of lights.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
The MPU 62 executes a main process, which will be described later, which is activated when the power is turned on, and then executes a normal process, which is a main process for advancing the game. In this normal process, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S301 to S309 at a cycle of 4 msec, repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 when the remaining time occurs, and steps S312 and subsequent steps according to the determination result of step S308. Execute.

In step S301, the MPU 62 executes an external output process for transmitting the timer interrupt process or the command set in the previous normal process to each control device on the sub side. In this external output processing, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the prize ball command is set, and if it determines that the prize ball command is set, the MPU 62 issues the prize ball command to the payout control device 70. Send. Further, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a command for the effect such as a command corresponding to the effect for the game round or a command corresponding to the effect for the open / close execution mode is set, and the command for the effect is set. If it is determined that the setting is made, a command for the effect is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90.

In step S302, the MPU 62 updates the variation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 updates the variable type counter CS by adding 1 to the previous value, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 64. .. If the MPU 62 reaches the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous value of the variation type counter CS, the value of the variation type counter CS is returned to 0 to clear the value.

In step S303, the MPU 62 executes a game turn control process for advancing the game turn. In the game time control process, the MPU 62 executes a winning / failing lottery and a sorting lottery, determines information related to a pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 47, and finally stops and displays the pattern on the main display unit 45. Execute the determination of information related to.
In step S304, the MPU 62 executes a game state transition process for shifting the game state. In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes a transition process to each game state such as an open / close execution mode, a high probability mode, and a high frequency support mode.
The game turn control process in step S303 and the game state transition process in step S304 will be described in detail later.

In step S305, the MPU 62 executes the demo display execution determination process. In this demo display execution determination process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a predetermined start waiting period for the start of the demo (for example, 30 sec) has elapsed without starting a new game after the end of the game. If it is determined that the start waiting period has elapsed, a demo command for starting the demo display is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90.
The voice emission control device 90 starts the demo display execution process based on the demo command transmitted from the MPU 62.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the start waiting period has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed. For example, when the start waiting period is 30 sec and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S305 is 4 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S305 is executed and reaches 7500 times, the start waiting period. Is determined to have passed. The configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary, and for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock. Further, if the MPU 62 starts a new game round while counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed, the MPU 62 resets the value of the count.

In step S306, the MPU 62 executes an electric service support process for executing drive control of the electric accessory 37a provided in the right operating port 37. In this electric service support process, the MPU 62 executes the electric accessory opening lottery based on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 64c of the RAM 64, and also performs the electric accessory opening lottery. If it is won, the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 37a is executed. Specifically, when the MPU 62 wins the electric accessory opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a in the open state. Then, after setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state, the MPU 62 drives the electric accessory drive unit 37b when it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed without the game ball winning a prize in the right operating port 37. Control is executed to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. Further, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory opening lottery.

In step S307, the MPU 62 executes the game ball launch control process. In this game ball launch control process, the MPU 62 causes the power supply / launch control device 80 to execute launch control for launching the game ball based on the player rotating the launch handle 27. Specifically, the power supply / launch control device 80 causes the game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch the game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 81 in a predetermined cycle (0.6 sec in the present embodiment). .. The solenoid is excited to launch the game ball with a firing intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 27. Further, the power supply / launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch the game ball when the predetermined launch conditions are satisfied.

In step S308, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 64. This power failure flag is set in the RAM 64 by inputting a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62. When the power failure monitoring board 65 confirms the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure monitoring board 65 outputs this power failure signal. The power failure flag is cleared when the next main process is executed.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 into a predetermined area such as the RAM 64, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the power failure flag by substituting 1 for the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64, and clears the power failure flag by substituting 0 for the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S308, the MPU 62 executes the power failure processing after step S312 without executing the processing after step S309. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 62 prohibits the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In step S313, the MPU 62 calculates and stores the RAM determination value (checksum of the RAM 64). In step S314, the MPU 62 prohibits access to the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 continues an infinite loop until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S308 that the power failure flag is not set, whether or not the timing for executing the next normal process is reached in step S309, that is, the current normal process is performed. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal processing has not been reached, that is, when the remaining time occurs, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step S310, and step S311 In, the variation type counter CS is updated. The MPU 62 repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 until it is determined in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has been reached.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has been reached, that is, when the remaining time has not occurred, the MPU 62 executes step S301 again to perform the next time. Start normal processing.

<Main processing>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main process.
In the main process, the MPU 62 executes steps S401 to S412 as shown in FIG.
In step S401, the MPU 62 executes a start-up process when the power is turned on. In this start-up process, the MPU 62 waits for the control board on the sub side (control board of the voice emission control device 90, etc.) to be in an operable state for a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) after the power is turned on. ) Elapses.

In step S402, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the permission prohibition period of 1 sec has elapsed. When the MPU 62 determines in step S402 that 1 sec has not elapsed, the MPU 62 repeatedly executes the process of step S402. Further, when it is determined in step S402 that 1 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S403.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S402 is executed. For example, when the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S402 is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S402 is executed and determines that 1 sec has elapsed when it reaches 10,000 times. The configuration for measuring the permission / prohibition period is arbitrary, and for example, the permission / prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock.

In step S403, the MPU 62 permits access to the RAM 64.
In step S404, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power supply / emission control device 80 is turned on.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is turned on, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on, the MPU 62 determines in step S405 whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64. To do.

Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S405 that the power failure flag is not set, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S409.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S405 that the power failure flag is set, the MPU 62 calculates the RAM determination value in step S406.
In step S407, the MPU 62 confirms the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 by determining whether or not the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 62 compares the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 with the RAM determination value saved in step S313 (processing at the time of power interruption) of normal processing, and if they match, the RAM determination value is compared. , The RAM determination value is determined to be normal, and if they do not match, the RAM determination value is determined to be abnormal.

Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is not normal, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is normal, the MPU 62 clears the power failure flag stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64 in step S408.

The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be determined by a method different from the method of confirming the consistency of the RAM determination value. For example, a keyword is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 in the power failure processing. The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be confirmed by writing and determining whether or not this keyword is normally written in the main process.

As described above, the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404, determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405, or the RAM determination value in step S407. If it is determined that is not normal, the processes after step S409 are executed.
Specifically, the MPU 62 clears the work area of the RAM 64 in step S409, and initializes the RAM 64 in step S410.

Therefore, for example, the manager of the game hall can initialize the data stored in the RAM 64 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM erase switch at the start of business of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 initializes the data stored in the RAM 64 when the occurrence of the power failure is not confirmed on the power failure monitoring board 65 or when the RAM determination value is abnormal.

After executing the process of step S408 or step S410, the MPU 62 transmits an initial command to the control board on the sub side (control board of the voice emission control device 90, etc.) in step S411, and interrupts the timer in step S412. Allows the occurrence of processing and shifts to the above-mentioned normal processing.
By receiving the initial command transmitted in step S411, the control board on the sub side recognizes that communication with the main control board 61 is normally performed, and executes self-initialization. To do.

<Game times control processing>
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game time control process.
In the game times control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S509 as shown in FIG.
In step S501, the MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode. When the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open / close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process without executing the processes after step S502. Therefore, when it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 does not start the progress of the game round regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to each of the operating ports 36 and 37 is detected.
The MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode by referring to the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64. The same applies to each of the following processes. The MPU 62 sets the open / close execution mode flag at the time of transition to the open / close execution mode, and clears the open / close execution mode flag at the end of the open / close execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress, in step S502, whether or not the main display unit 45 is in the variable display, that is, the game is in progress. Judge whether or not.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 45 is not in the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game round start processing of steps S503 to S505.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game round progress processing of steps S506 to S509.

First, the game round start processing of steps S503 to S505 will be described.
In step S503, the MPU 62 grasps the number of holdings stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit and the number of holdings stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit, and these holding numbers. It is determined whether or not the total number CRN of is "0" or less. When the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 holds the first result display unit holding area Ra or the second result display unit holding area Ra in step S504. The data setting process for setting the hold information stored in Rb for the digestion of the game times is executed. After that, in step S505, the MPU 62 causes the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 to start the variation display to execute the variation start process for digesting the game times, and ends the game times control process.
Hereinafter, the data setting process in step S504 and the fluctuation start process in step S505 will be described in detail.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing.
In the data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S601 to S611 as shown in FIG.
In step S601, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit set in step S204 of the winning process for the operating port is "0" or less. To do. When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start hold storage number RbN is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the data setting process for the first result display unit of steps S602 to S606, and in step S601. When it is determined that the second start hold storage number RbN is not "0" or less, the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S607 to S611 is executed.

As described above, the data setting process includes the data setting process for the first result display unit, which sets the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit for digestion of the game times, and the second result display unit. It has a data setting process for a second result display unit that sets the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for digestion of game times.
Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start hold storage number RbN is not "0" or less, the second result display unit does not execute the data setting process for the first result display unit. Execute the data setting process for. In other words, when the MPU 62 determines that there is holding information stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the right operating port 37, the MPU 62 moves to the central operating port 36. Regardless of whether or not there is hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on the winning of the game ball, the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is preferentially played. Set for multiple digestions.

First, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S602 to S606 will be described.
In step S602, the MPU 62 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the first start hold storage number RaN of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit.
In step S603, the MPU 62 moves the hold information stored in the first area Ra1 of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE.
In step S604, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process for shifting the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the hold information stored in each area Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the hold information of the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, shifts the hold information of the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and shifts the hold information of the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra4. Shift to area Ra3.

In step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display unit flag stored in the RAM 64. The second result display unit flag is a flag for specifying which of the first result display unit 45a and the second result display unit 45b, which of the main display unit 45, has started the variable display when the game is digested. Is. In this step S605, since the MPU 62 has cleared the second result display unit flag, the first result display unit 45a is variablely displayed based on the winning of the game ball to the central operating port 36 at the time of digesting the game times. Indicates to start.

In step S606, the MPU 62 sets a shift time command for recognizing that the shift of the hold information has been executed, transmits the set shift time command to the voice emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This shift command indicates that the shift of the hold information is executed for the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the central operating port 36. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
The voice emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the first hold lamp unit 49a based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 reduces the number of lights of the first holding lamp unit 49a as the number of holdings of the game balls winning in the central operating port 36 decreases.

Next, the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S607 to S611 will be described.
In step S607, the MPU 62 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the second start hold storage number RbN of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit.
In step S608, the MPU 62 moves the hold information stored in the second area Rb1 of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit to the execution area AE.
In step S609, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process for shifting the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the hold information stored in each area Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the hold information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the hold information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, and shifts the hold information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third area. Shift to area Rb3.

In step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display unit flag in the RAM 64. In this step S610, since the MPU 62 sets the second result display unit flag, the second result display unit 45b is variablely displayed based on the winning of the game ball to the right operating port 37 when the game round is digested. Indicates to start.

In step S611, the MPU 62 sets a shift time command for recognizing that the shift of the hold information has been executed, transmits the set shift time command to the voice emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This shift command indicates that the shift of the hold information is executed for the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the right operating port 37. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
The voice emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the second hold lamp unit 49b based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 reduces the number of lights of the second holding lamp unit 49b as the number of holdings of the game balls winning in the right operating port 37 decreases.

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process.
In the variation start process, the MPU 62 executes steps S701 to S718 as shown in FIG.
In step S701, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the winning / failing lottery mode is not the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the winning / failing table for the low-probability mode (see FIG. 7A) from the winning / failing table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 in step S702. When it is read and the winning / failing lottery mode is determined to be the high probability mode in step S701, in step S703, the winning / failing table for the high probability mode (see FIG. 7B) is stored from the winning / failing table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. read out.

After executing the process of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 62 executes the pass / fail determination process in step S704. In this pass / fail determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the pass / fail table read in step S702 or step S703, thereby resulting in a win / fail lottery result (win / fail result). To judge. As described above, the winning / failing result is one of "big hit winning", "special losing result", and "normal losing result", and even if the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode, it is a high probability mode. The same is true.

In step S705, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing result determined in step S704 is "big hit winning". When the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S706, and when it determines in step S705 that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning". , Step S712 and subsequent processes are executed.

First, in step S705, a process (processing after step S706) when the winning / failing result is determined to be "big hit winning" by the MPU 62 will be described.
In step S706, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 starts variable display on the first result display unit 45a based on the winning of the game ball to the central operating port 36. In step S707, the first distribution table (see FIG. 8A) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the second result display unit 45b based on the winning of the game ball to the right operating port 37 In step S708, the second distribution table (see FIG. 8B) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

After executing the process of step S707 or step S708, the MPU 62 executes the distribution determination process in step S709. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read in step S707 or step S708 to obtain the result of the distribution lottery ( Sorting result) is judged.

In step S710, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for the jackpot result. In the stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 62 determines in step S709 the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45. It is determined according to the distribution result, and the determined information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 has a pattern that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 by comparing the distribution result determined in step S709 with the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in the ROM 63 in advance. Determine relevant information. The stop result table for the jackpot result defines the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 differently for each distribution result.

In step S711, the MPU 62 sets a flag in the RAM 64 according to the distribution result determined in step S709. Specifically, when the MPU 62 specifies that the distribution result is a "low probability result", it sets a low probability result flag and specifies that it is an "explicit small round high probability result". Is set with the explicit small round high probability result flag, and when it is specified that it is the "most advantageous result", the most advantageous result flag is set. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S716.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 determines the distribution result by referring to these flags.

Next, in step S705, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the winning / failing result is not “big hit winning” (processing after step S712) will be described.
In step S712, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result determined in step S704 is a “special miss result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S712 that the pass / fail result is a "special miss result", it executes the processes after step S713, and determines in step S712 that the pass / fail result is not a "special miss result". Is the process from step S715 onward.

In step S713, the MPU 62 executes the stop result setting process for the special deviation result. In the stop result setting process for the special deviation result, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, and the determination is made. The generated information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 by referring to the stop result table for the special deviation result stored in the ROM 63 in advance. The mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the special deviation result is different from the mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the jackpot result.
In step S714, the MPU 62 sets the special disengagement flag in the RAM 64.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is the "special miss result" by referring to the special miss flag.

On the other hand, in step S715, the MPU 62 normally executes the stop result setting process for the outlier result. In this stop result setting process for the normal deviation result, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, and the determination is made. The generated information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 by referring to the stop result table for the normal deviation result stored in advance in the ROM 63. The aspect of the pattern set in the stop result table for the normal deviation result is different from the aspect of the pattern set in the stop result table for the jackpot result and the stop result table for the special deviation result.

After executing any of the processes of step S711, step S714, and step S715, the MPU 62 executes the display duration (display duration) setting process in step S716.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the display duration setting process.
In the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S808 as shown in FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the special off flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines that the special deviation flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S802.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the special deviation flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S806.

First, in step S801, processing when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the special deviation flag is not set in the RAM 64 (processing after step S802) will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 62 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64.

In step S803, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the reach display occurs on the symbol display device 47. Specifically, in the MPU 62, when the distribution result determined in step S709 is a "low probability result" or a "most advantageous result", and the pass / fail result determined in step S704 is a "normal deviation result". At the same time, if the reach generation lottery is won, it is determined that the reach display will occur. As described above, the MPU 62 compares the reach table stored in advance in the reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the hold ball storage area 64b. Execute a reach generation lottery.

When the MPU 62 determines that the reach display occurs in step S803, the MPU 62 reads out the reach generation display duration table stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 in step S804.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the reach display does not occur, in step S805, the display duration table for non-reach stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is displayed. read out.

Next, in step S801, processing when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the special deviation flag is set in the RAM 64 (processing after step S806) will be described.
In step S806, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode.

When it is determined in step S806 that the winning / failing lottery mode is not the high-probability mode (when the winning / failing lottery mode is determined to be the low-probability mode), the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S802 described above.
On the other hand, when the winning / failing lottery mode is determined to be the high probability mode in step S806, the MPU 62 has a special display duration stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 in step S807. Is read.

After executing any of the processes of step S804, step S805, and step S807, the MPU 62 determines the display duration in step S808. Specifically, when the MPU 62 reads the reach generation display duration table or the reach non-generation display duration table, it is acquired from the variable type counter buffer by referring to each display duration table. The display duration corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS is determined, and the determined display duration is set in the display duration counter provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. When the special display duration is read, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in the present embodiment) in the display duration counters provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
The special display duration is shorter than the display duration determined by referring to the reach generation display duration table and the reach non-reach display duration table.

Here, the display duration table for non-reach generation is set so that the display duration becomes shorter as the number of held items increases. Therefore, the display duration when digesting the hold information related to the central operating port 36 is set so as to become shorter as the number of holdings related to the central operating port 36 increases. The display duration when digesting the hold information related to the right operating port 37 is set so as to become shorter as the number of holdings related to the right operating port 37 increases. Further, the display duration table for non-reach is set so that the display duration is shorter when the support mode is the high frequency support mode than when the support mode is the low frequency support mode. In other words, if the number of holdings is the same, the display duration in the high frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low frequency support mode.
Further, the display duration determined by referring to the reach display duration table is different from the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-reach display duration table.

The display duration table for non-reach may be set to the opposite relationship to the above-mentioned relationship, such as increasing the display duration as the number of holds increases, depending on the number of holds and the support mode. It may be configured so as not to fluctuate. In addition, a display duration table may be set individually for each of the winning / failing result and the sorting result.

Returning to the description of the fluctuation start processing, the processing after step S717 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S717, the MPU 62 sets a variation command and a type command. The MPU 62 transmits the variation command and the type command set in step S717 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be described in detail later.

The variable command contains information related to the display duration. In addition, the variable command does not include information on whether or not reach display occurs.
Here, as described above, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-reach display duration table are mutually exclusive. It's different.
Therefore, even if the information on whether or not the reach display occurs is not included in the variable command, the reach display is displayed by the voice emission control device 90, which is the control device on the sub side, based on the information related to the display duration. It is possible to determine whether or not it occurs. In this sense, it can be said that the variable command indirectly includes information on whether or not a reach display occurs. The variable command may directly include information on whether or not reach display occurs.

In addition, since the special display duration is shorter than the display duration determined by referring to the reach generation display duration table and the non-reach display duration table, it is based on the information related to the display duration. Therefore, it is possible for the voice emission control device 90, which is the control device on the sub side, to determine whether or not the display duration is the special display duration. In this sense, it can be said that the variable command indirectly includes information on the special display duration. The variable command may directly include information on the special display duration.

The type command contains information related to the result of success or failure. In other words, the type command includes each information related to "big hit winning", "special losing result", and "normal losing result" as information related to the winning / failing result. In addition, the type command includes information related to the distribution result. In other words, the type command includes each information related to the "low probability result", the "explicit small round high probability result", and the "most advantageous result" as the information related to the distribution result.
In the following description, the winning / failing result and the sorting result are collectively referred to as a game result. In other words, the type command contains information related to the game result.

In step S718, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, and causes the main display unit 45 to start variable display based on the determination result. After that, the MPU 62 ends the fluctuation start process.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, the first one is based on the winning of the game ball to the central operating port 36 at the time of digesting the game times. Since it indicates that the result display unit 45a starts the variable display, the first result display unit 45a is made to start the variable display.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 is second based on the winning of the game ball to the right operating port 37 at the time of digesting the game times. Since it indicates that the result display unit 45b starts the variable display, the second result display unit 45b is made to start the variable display.

Returning to the description of the game time control process, the game time progress process of steps S506 to S509 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S502, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the main display unit 45 is in the variable display, and if it is determined that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display, the MPU 62 is for advancing the game times in steps S506 to S509. Execute the process.

In step S506, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the display duration set in step S716 of the fluctuation start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value set in the display duration counter of the RAM 64 is "0" or less. The value of this display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display duration has not elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the variable display process in step S507. In this variation display process, the MPU 62 updates the display of the main display unit 45 during the variation display. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display duration has elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the variation end processing in step S508. In this variation end process, the MPU 62 stores information (main) stored in the RAM 64 in any of the processes of step S710, step S713, and step S715 of the variation start process executed when the main display unit 45 starts the variation display. Information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 45) is specified. Then, at the end of the game round, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 45 so that the pattern corresponding to the specified information is displayed on the main display unit 45 during the variable display.

Here, the pattern that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 differs depending on the type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game hall or the like can confirm the game result by visually observing the main display unit 45 at the end of the game round. According to this, the manager of the amusement park can easily confirm, for example, whether or not a fraudulent act is performed to make the pachinko machine 10 perform the same behavior as when the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit is won. Can be done
Further, the main display unit 45 has a narrower display area than the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 is a symbol sequence to be stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. Compared to Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, at the end of the game round, the player determines whether or not the jackpot has been won by checking the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 instead of the main display unit 45. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the screen G.

In step S509, the MPU 62 sets the variable end command. The MPU 62 transmits the variation end command set in step S509 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.
The voice emission control device 90 executes a process for ending the effect of the game round based on the variable end command transmitted from the MPU 62. Here, the voice emission control device 90 may be configured to independently end the production of the game times without requiring the reception of the variable end command.

<Game state transition process>
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game state transition process.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S917 as shown in FIG.
In step S901, the MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S902.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that it is in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S914.

First, in step S901, the process when the MPU 62 determines that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (processes after step S902) will be described.
In step S902, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable display of the main display unit 45 has been completed. When it is determined in step S902 that the variation display of the main display unit 45 has not been completed, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the variable display of the main display unit 45 is completed, whether or not the hit / fail result corresponds to the shift to the open / close execution mode in step S903. Is determined. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing result is a "big hit winning" or a "special losing result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the result of success or failure corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the open / close execution mode flag in the RAM 64 and then executes the processes after step S904.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the winning / failing result does not correspond to the transition to the open / close execution mode (when it is determined that the winning / failing result is a "normally out of order result"), the game End the state transition process.

In step S904, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S904 that the result of success or failure is a "special deviation result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S905.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S904 that the hit / fail result is not the "special miss result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S911.

First, in step S904, a process (processes after step S905) when the MPU 62 determines that the pass / fail result is a “special deviation result” will be described.
In step S905, the MPU 62 sets “2” in the open / close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. This open / close counter SOC is a counter for specifying the total number of times that the large winning opening 38a of the variable winning device 38 is opened / closed by the MPU 62 when shifting to the open / close execution mode.

In step S906, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S907, the waiting time (standby) for starting a small hit is applied to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. Set "50" as the period). The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting a small hit is 0.1 sec. The waiting time for starting a small hit is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

In step S908, the MPU 62 sets a small hit command. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process. This small hit command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode. The MPU 62 transmits the small hit command set in step S908 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the open / close execution mode based on the small hit command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the winning / failing lottery mode is not the high probability mode (when determining that the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode), the MPU 62 counters of the RAM 64 in step S909. “1000” is set as the waiting time (standby period) for the opening in the timer counter T provided in the area 64a. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the opening is 2 sec. The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

In step S910, the MPU 62 sets the opening command. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode. The MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S910 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the open / close execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later.

Next, in step S904, a process (processes after step S911) when the MPU 62 determines that the pass / fail result is not a “special deviation result” will be described.
In step S911, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is a small round high probability result (“explicit small round high probability result”).

When the MPU 62 determines in step S911 that the distribution result is a small round high accuracy result, the MPU 62 sets “2” in the round counter RC provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S912. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S911 that the distribution result is not a small round high accuracy result, that is, when the distribution result is determined to be a "low accuracy result" or a "most advantageous result", the step. In S913, "15" is set in the round counter RC. This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 62 when shifting to the open / close execution mode.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of open / close execution modes in which the end conditions are different from each other. Specifically, as the opening / closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 has a round number regulation mode that shifts when the winning / failing result is "big hit winning" and an opening / closing number that shifts when the winning / failing result is "special loss result". It has a specified mode.

The round number regulation mode ends on condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
The opening / closing number regulation mode ends on the condition that the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed a predetermined total number of times, or that a predetermined number of game balls have won the large winning opening 38a. Here, the total number of times of opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a corresponds to the value set in the opening / closing counter SOC. This open / close number regulation mode does not end on the condition that the number of times the round game is executed.

The pachinko machine 10 opens and closes the large winning opening 38a once for each round game. In addition, one round game continues until one of the following two conditions is met. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state, and then sets the opening / closing door 38b to the closed state again by satisfying one of the following two conditions.
(1) The predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) has elapsed. (2) The total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a reaches the predetermined upper limit.

After executing the process of step S912 or step S913, the MPU 62 executes the process after step S909 described above.

As described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the winning / failing result corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 does not care about the type of the game result, except for the special deviation result of the high probability mode. Set the waiting time for opening in the timer counter T. In other words, the waiting time for the opening is the same regardless of the type of game result, except for the special out-of-game result in the high probability mode.
The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and for example, the waiting time may be slightly different depending on the type of the game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Further, for example, the waiting time for the opening differs greatly between the case where the game result is the "low probability result" or the "most advantageous result" and the case where the game result is other than these. The configuration may be significantly different depending on the type of.

Next, in step S901, the process when the MPU 62 determines that the open / close execution mode is in progress (processes after step S914) will be described.
In step S914, the MPU 62 executes the large winning opening opening / closing process.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a large winning opening opening / closing process.
In the large winning opening opening / closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1025 as shown in FIG.
In step S1001, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the large winning opening 38a is open.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the large winning opening 38a is not open, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1002.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the large winning opening 38a is open, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1006.

First, in step S1001, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the large winning opening 38a is not open (processes after step S1002) will be described.
In step S1002, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are “0” or less, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the timer counter T of the timer counter T It is determined whether or not the value is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the large winning opening opening process in step S1004.
Hereinafter, the process of opening the large winning opening in step S1004 will be described in detail.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening opening process.
In the large winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1107 as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the hit / fail result is a "special miss result", the MPU 62 sets "1" in the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S1102, and steps. In S1103, "85" is set in the timer counter T. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the winning / failing result is not the "special deviation result", the MPU 62 sets "8" in the winning counter PC in step S1104, and the distribution result in step S1105. Is a low-round high-accuracy result (“explicit small-round high-accuracy result”).

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the distribution result is a low-round high-accuracy result, the timer counter T is set to "85" in step S1103 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the distribution result is not a small round high accuracy result, the timer counter T is set to "15000" in step S1106. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 sec.

After executing the process of step S1103 or step S1106, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the large winning opening 38a in step S1107. In this opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c. After that, the MPU 62 finishes the large winning opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1102 or step S1104 defines the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a.
Further, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1103 or step S1106 defines the upper limit duration from setting the opening / closing door 38b to the open state to setting it to the closed state again. Therefore, as described above, the MPU 62 sets two types of upper limit durations having different lengths by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15000". Specifically, the MPU 62 has a long-term mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec (long-term mode) and a short-time mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-time mode (short-term mode). Aspect) and is set.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 causes the game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch the game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 81 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the winning / failing result is not the "special deviation result", the MPU 62 sets "8" in the winning counter PC as described above, thereby playing a game to the large winning opening 38a. The upper limit of the total number of winning balls is set to eight.
Therefore, the upper limit duration of the long-time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls, and therefore is the upper limit of eight game balls. Is easy to win in the large winning opening 38a.
On the other hand, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls (more specifically, the firing of the game balls). Since it is shorter than the cycle), it is difficult to make the game ball win the big winning opening 38a. Depending on the timing, it is possible to make about one game ball win in the large winning opening 38a.

Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the winning / failing result is a "special loss result", the MPU 62 sets "1" in the winning counter PC as described above to enter the large winning opening 38a. The upper limit of the total number of winning games is set to one. The upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls (more specifically, the firing cycle of the game balls). Because it is short), it is difficult to get the game ball to win the big winning opening 38a. Depending on the timing, it is possible to make about one game ball win in the large winning opening 38a.

Returning to the description of the large winning opening opening / closing process, the processes after step S1005 will be described with reference to FIG.
The MPU 62 sets the release command in step S1005 after executing the large winning opening opening process in step S1004. This release command contains information relating to the round counter RC. The value of the round counter RC is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC each time the round game is executed. In other words, the release command contains information about the number of times the round game has been executed. Further, the MPU 62 transmits the release command set in step S1005 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, in step S1001, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the large winning opening 38a is open (processes after step S1006) will be described.
In step S1006, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less. That is, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T has elapsed in step S1103 or step S1106 of the large winning opening opening process.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1007.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1018.

First, in step S1006, processing when the value of the timer counter T is determined by the MPU 62 to be not "0" or less (processing after step S1007) will be described.
In step S1007, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize has been generated in the large winning opening 38a. The determination as to whether or not a prize has been generated in the large winning opening 38a is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the large winning opening 38a.

When it is determined in step S1007 that the winning opening 38a has not been won, the MPU 62 ends the opening / closing process of the winning opening.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1007 that the large winning opening 38a has been won, the MPU 62 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the winning counter PC in step S1008.

In step S1009, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1009 that the value of the winning counter PC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1009 that the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process in step S1010. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the opening / closing door 38b to the closed state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c.

In step S1011 the MPU 62 sets the closure command. This closure command contains information relating to the round counter RC. The value of the round counter RC is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC each time the round game is executed. In other words, the closing command contains information about the number of times the round game has been executed. The MPU 62 transmits the closing command set in step S1011 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S1012, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the result of success or failure is a "special deviation result", the MPU 62 sets the value of the open / close counter SOC to "0" and then executes the processes after step S1024 described later.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the hit / fail result is not the "special miss result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1013.
In step S1013, the MPU 62 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC.

In step S1014, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S1015. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1015 is an open standby until the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state, the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state again, and then the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state again. The time is specified. In this embodiment, the opening standby time is 1 sec. This opening standby time is the same regardless of the type and progress of the opening / closing execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1016.
In step S1016, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the ending. As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 sec. The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The waiting time for the ending is the same as the waiting time for the opening regardless of the type of the game result, except for the special out-of-game result in the high probability mode. That is, the waiting time for this ending is the same regardless of the type of the open / close execution mode, except for the special deviation result of the high probability mode.
The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and may be configured to be slightly different depending on the type of the game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Further, for example, the waiting time for the ending is significantly different between the case where the game result is the "low probability result" or the "most advantageous result" and the case where the game result is other than these. The configuration may be significantly different depending on the type of.

In step S1017, the MPU 62 sets the ending command. The MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S1017 to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the open / close execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, in step S1006, processing when the value of the timer counter T is determined by the MPU 62 to be “0” or less (processing after step S1018) will be described.
In step S1018, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process in the same manner as in step S1010 described above.
In step S1019, the MPU 62 sets the close command in the same manner as in step S1011 described above.

In step S1020, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.
The MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1021 when it is determined in step S1020 that the winning / failing result is not the "special missed result", that is, when the winning / failing result is determined to be the "big hit winning".
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1020 that the hit / fail result is a "special miss result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1023.

First, in step S1020, a process (processes after step S1021) when the pass / fail result is determined not to be a "special deviation result" by the MPU 62 will be described.
In step S1021, the MPU 62 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC.

In step S1022, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1022 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1015 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1022 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1016 described above.

Next, in step S1020, a process (processing after step S1023) when the pass / fail result is determined to be a "special error result" by the MPU 62 will be described.
In step S1023, the MPU 62 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the open / close counter SOC.

In step S1024, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less. Here, in step S1012, if the MPU 62 determines that the result is a "special deviation result", or after executing step S1023, the MPU 62 executes step S1024.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1024 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1015 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1024 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 determines in step S1025 whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. ..

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1025 that the winning / failing lottery mode is not the high-probability mode (when it is determined that the winning / failing lottery mode is the low-probability mode), the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1016 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1025 that the winning / losing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process. In other words, in the special out-of-order result of the high probability mode, the waiting time for the ending is 0 sec.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process, the processes after step S915 will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S914, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening / closing counter SOC value is “0” or less and the round counter RC value is “0” or less in step S915. judge.

When it is determined in step S915 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S915 that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are "0" or less, the value of the timer counter T becomes "0" or less in step S916. It is determined whether or not it is 0 "or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S916 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S916 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, the MPU 62 clears the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S917, and then clears the open / close execution mode flag. Executes the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process.
Hereinafter, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described in detail.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.
In the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1201 to S1209 as shown in FIG.
In step S1201, the MPU 62 determines whether the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1202.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the distribution result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1205.

First, in step S1201, the process when the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is the “most advantageous result” or the “explicit small round high probability result” (processes after step S1202) will be described.
In step S1202, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.

In step S1203, the MPU 62 clears the number-of-times limit flag stored in the RAM 64.
Here, the high-frequency support mode continues until the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number-of-times limit flag is not set, at least until a "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

In step S1204, the MPU 62 sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high probability mode flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the winning / failing lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

When ending the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 sets a flag (low probability result flag, explicit small round high probability result flag, and most advantageous result flag) set in the RAM 64 according to the distribution result. ) And clear the special off flag. Further, the above-mentioned step S205 of the winning process for the operating port, step S701 of the variation start process, step S806 of the display duration setting process, step S906 of the game state transition process, and the step of the large winning port opening / closing process. In S1025, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode by determining whether or not the high-probability mode flag is set in the RAM 64.

Next, in step S1201, the process when the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is not the “most advantageous result” or the “explicit small round high probability result” (processes after step S1205) will be described.
In step S1205, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is a “low probability result”.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1205 that the distribution result is not a "low probability result" (when it is determined that the hit / fail result is a "special deviation result"), the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode. To do.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1205 that the distribution result is a "low probability result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1206.

In step S1206, the MPU 62 clears the high probability mode flag. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the winning / failing lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode continues until at least the winning / losing lottery becomes a "big hit" and the distribution result is other than the "low probability result".

In step S1207, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1208, the MPU 62 sets “100” to the value of the game count counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
In step S1209, the MPU 62 sets the number limit flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the number-of-times limit flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 games, which is the end reference number set in the game count counter, are played. Continue until the times are digested. The MPU 62 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag when 100 game times have been completed. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
The MPU 62 executes these processes as the electric service support process in step S306 of the normal process, but detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, if the winning / losing lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution result becomes the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, the gaming state is the current state. Regardless of the game state, after the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, the mode shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

In addition, when the winning / losing lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution result becomes a "low probability result" in the distribution lottery, the game state is in the open / close execution mode (that is, regardless of the current game state). After the end of the round number regulation mode), the mode shifts to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The low-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery, and the high-frequency support mode is low when 100 game times are completed without becoming a "big hit winning" in the winning or losing lottery. Move to frequency support mode.

In addition, if the winning / failing lottery does not result in a "big hit", that is, if the winning / failing result becomes a "special loss result" or a "normal loss result" in the win / loss lottery, the gaming state does not shift.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 is advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the central operating port 36 and the right operating port 37. It functions as a game state transition means for shifting the game state from the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) to the open / close execution mode.

<Electrical configuration of voice emission control device 90 and display control device 100>
FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the voice emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 21, the voice emission control device 90 includes a voice emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the voice light emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 constituting the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the ROM 93 and the RAM 94.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the ROM 93, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. Is. The RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a.

The MPU 92 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main control device 60 as described above. Further, the input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the push button 25b. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, a speaker unit 24, and a display control device 100.
The MPU 92 executes drive control of the various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c and the speaker unit 24 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60.
Further, the MPU 92 transmits a command as a result of analyzing these commands to the display control device 100. The voice emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) provided with connectors at both ends of the signal line.

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101, an MPU 102, a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 constituting the MPU 102, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Here, the MPU 102 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104. The MPU 102, VDP 105, character ROM 106, and video RAM 107 are mounted on the display control board 101.

The MPU 102 analyzes a command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90, performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on this command, and executes control of the VDP 105. Specifically, the MPU 102 executes control of the VDP 105 by generating a command for the VDP 105.

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information.
The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the program ROM 103, and is volatile that requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. It is a means of memory.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 47. Since the VDP 105 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 reads image data from the character ROM 106 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 102, and stores the image data in the video RAM 107.

The character ROM 106 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 47. The character ROM 106 holds bitmap format image data of various symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.
The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 47, and the display content of the symbol display device 47 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

<About timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes a timer interrupt process for advancing the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes steps S2001 to S2005, as shown in FIG.

In step S2001, the MPU 92 executes the command storage process. In this command storage process, when the MPU 92 receives a command from the MPU 62, the MPU 92 stores the command in the RAM 94. Specifically, the RAM 94 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 62, and the MPU 92 stores the commands in the ring buffer in the order received from the MPU 62. The MPU 92 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order stored in the ring buffer.

In step S2002, the MPU 92 executes the effect determination process based on the command received from the MPU 62. In the effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines the effect for the game round, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like. This effect determination process will be described in detail later.
In step S2003, the MPU 92 executes the effect execution process based on the content of the effect determination process in step S2002. Specifically, in the effect execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, and executes voice control of the speaker unit 24.

In step S2004, the MPU 92 executes the demo display execution process based on the demo command received from the MPU 62. In the demo display execution process, the MPU 92 executes the demo display when a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 30 sec) for starting the demo has elapsed without starting a new game round after the end of the game round. .. Specifically, in the demo display execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24.

In step S2005, a command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the effect determination process of step S2002 to the display control device 100 is executed. In this command transmission process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not it is time to transmit various commands stored as a command list in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94 to the display control device 100, and transmits various commands to the display control device 100. When it is determined that the timing of transmission to is reached, the command is transmitted to the display control device 100.
After that, the MPU 92 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 executes the effect determination process in order to execute the effect for the game round, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2101 to S2116 as shown in FIG. 23.

In step S2101, the MPU 92 determines whether or not it has received the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2101 that each command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2109.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that each command has been received in step S2101, the game result is "most advantageous result" or "low probability" based on the content of the type command in step S2102. It is determined whether or not it is a "result".

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2102 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result", the MPU 92 executes the symbol determination process corresponding to the type of the game result in step S2103. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the same odd number or the same even number is used as the stop result to finally display the stop on the effective line L. When the information related to the combination of symbols having numbers is determined and it is determined that the game result is a "low probability result", the same even number is displayed as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Determine the information related to the combination of symbols to have. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2102 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result", the game result is "in step S2104" based on the content of the type command. It is determined whether or not the result is "normally out of order".
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the game result is not a "normal deviation result", that is, when the game result is either a "special deviation result" or an "explicit small round high probability result", step S2105 In, the common symbol determination process is executed. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines information related to a special symbol combination as a stop result that is finally stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Specifically, the MPU 92 is not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a combination of special symbols having different numbers that are not selected when a "normally out-of-order result" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery (for example). "3.4.1") is decided. The combination of these special symbols is the same regardless of the type of game result.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the game result is a "normal deviation result", the MPU 92 executes a symbol determination process for normal deviation in step S2106. In this pattern determination process for normal deviation, the MPU 92 determines whether or not reach display occurs based on the content of the variable command.

When the MPU 92 determines that the reach display occurs, the MPU 92 determines the information related to the combination of the symbols of the reach display as the stop result of finally displaying the stop display on the effective line L. The combination of the reach display symbols is randomly determined by lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 92 displays information related to a combination of symbols different from the combination of the above-mentioned symbols as a stop result of finally displaying the stop on the effective line L. decide. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines a combination of symbols having the same number, a combination of special symbols, and a combination of symbols different from the combination of reach display symbols by lottery or the like.

After executing any of the processes of step S2103, step S2105, and step S2106, the MPU 92 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S2107. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects the effect duration (effect duration) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In step S2107, the MPU 92 also executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate a notice display.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S2108, the MPU 92 sets a fluctuation start command and a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in any of the processes of step S2103, step S2105, and step S2106. Then, the MPU 92 stores the fluctuation start command and the stop result command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. These fluctuation start commands and stop result commands are transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 creates a data table from the program ROM 103 for executing the display of the start and stop results of the variation display on the symbol display device 47 based on the variation start command and the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 92. read out. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 finally stops and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 92 on the effective line L after starting the variable display.

After executing the process of step S2108, or when it is determined in step S2101 that the change command and the type command have not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes of step S2109 and subsequent steps.
In step S2109, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2113.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has been received in step S2109, the MPU 92 determines the type of the game result in step S2110 based on the content of the opening command.

In step S2111, the MPU 92 executes the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S2110. In the process of determining the effect for the open / close execution mode, the MPU 92 selects the effect A as the effect for the open / close execution mode when it is determined in step S2110 that the game result is a “special deviation result”. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is an "explicit small round high probability result", the MPU 92 selects the effect B as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 selects the effect C or the effect D as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "low probability result", the MPU 92 selects the effect D as the effect for the open / close execution mode.
The duration of the effect A and the effect B corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the duration of the effect C and the effect D corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in the long-time mode in the opening / closing execution mode.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above based on the selection results of the effects A to D.

In step S2112, the MPU 92 sets a command for opening / closing execution mode including information related to the effect for opening / closing execution mode selected in step S2111. Then, the MPU 92 stores the open / close execution mode command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This open / close execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process in step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the effect for the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 47 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90.

After executing the process of step S2112, or when it is determined in step S2109 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes of step S2113 and subsequent steps.
In step S2113, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the MPU 92 has received a small hit command.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2113 that the small hit command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S2116.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the small hit command has been received in step S2113, the MPU 92 executes the small hit effect determination process in step S2114. In this small hit effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects the content of the small hit effect by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above based on the content of the selected effect.

In step S2115, the MPU 92 sets a small hit effect command related to the small hit effect determined in the small hit effect determination process of step S2114. Then, the MPU 92 stores the small hit effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This small hit effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process in step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads a data table for executing the small hit effect on the symbol display device 47 from the program ROM 103 based on the small hit effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the small hit effect.

After executing the process of step S2115, or when it is determined in step S2113 that the small hit command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes of step S2116 and subsequent steps.
In step S2116, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes a process for advancing the effect for the open / close execution mode based on, for example, the open command, the close command, and the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62. After that, the MPU 92 ends the effect determination process.

<Relationship between game results and game status>
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result and the game state based on the execution of various processes will be described.
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state and the like. Specifically, FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result excluding the “normal deviation result” and the game state, and the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game state and the like are arranged in the row direction.
As shown in FIG. 24, the pachinko machine 10 has the winning / failing results of the "big hit winning" and the "special losing result", the "explicit small round high probability result", and the "most advantageous" as the game results excluding the "normal loss result". It has a "result" and a "low probability result" distribution result.

Here, as shown in the second column of the table in FIG. 24, the "special loss result" is a game result selected when the "big hit winning" is not obtained in the winning / losing lottery (symbol x in the figure). In addition, the distribution result is a game result selected when a "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery (symbol ○ in the figure).
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result excluding the “normal deviation result” and the game state and the like will be described. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows, but the combination of the game result and the game state, the content of the game result, and the game state, etc. The contents such as the game state are arbitrary.

In the "special deviation result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the opening / closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In addition, the winning / failing lottery mode does not shift in the "special loss result".
Further, in the "special deviation result" of the low probability mode, the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect A, and in the "special deviation result" of the high probability mode, the stop result is stopped. The result is a combination of special symbols and a small hit effect instead of the effect for the open / close execution mode.

In the "explicit small round high accuracy result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to two times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. To. In addition, in the "explicit small round high probability result", the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. Further, in the "explicit small round high accuracy result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect B. In addition, in the "explicit small round high accuracy result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Further, in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 displays an image clearly indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode on the display screen G.
Therefore, the player can grasp that the game result is the "explicit small round high accuracy result" by confirming the effect for the opening / closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result" and the "low probability result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to 15 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is 15 in a long time mode. Executed times.
Here, in the "most advantageous result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number, and the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode for the open / close execution mode. The production of is production C or production D. Specifically, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect C, and the combination of symbols having the same stop result is an even number. If, the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect D.
Further, in the "low probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the winning / losing lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect D. Become. Further, in the "best result" and "low probability result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode.

Therefore, the player has the game result as the "most advantageous result" when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect C. Can be grasped. However, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the player confirms the stop result and the effect for the open / close execution mode, so that the game result is the "most advantageous result". And it is not possible to know whether it is a "low probability result". In other words, even if the "most advantageous result" is obtained in the distribution lottery, if the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the symbol display device 47 will display the game result. Is disguised as if it was a "low probability result".

Then, in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 displays an image clearly indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode on the display screen G. In other words, the symbol display device 47 releases the camouflage that was applied as if the game result was a "low probability result".

<About the flow after shifting to the high probability mode>
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a right operating port, a variable winning device, and a symbol display device when the winning / failing result becomes a “special deviation result” after shifting to the high probability mode.
In addition, the high probability mode shifts to the case where the winning / losing lottery becomes a "big hit winning" and the distribution lottery is divided into the "explicit small round high probability result" or the "most advantageous result". In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Further, in FIG. 25, the open state of the right operating port 37 and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are shown as solid lines, and the closed state of the right operating port 37 and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are shown as a two-dot chain line.

First, the MPU 102 starts variable display of a plurality of symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, thereby performing high speed. Move to a variable period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, when the winning / failing lottery results in a "big hit" and the lottery is distributed to the "most advantageous result", the MPU 102 is based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number (“7, 7, 7” in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L to notify the result of the winning / failing lottery (FIG. 25 (A)). )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number-specified mode in which the round game is performed with a maximum number of 15 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in a long-time mode.
After the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 25 (A), the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 in order to suggest a right-handed hit to the player.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits the right with the maximum amount of rotation of the launch handle 27, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is the side portion where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed. By shifting from the side of the center to the side of the opposite side, the probability of winning the right operating port 37 can be increased rather than that of the central operating port 36.
Then, when a prize is detected in the right operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of game balls so much. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player can advance the game advantageously by firing the game ball toward the right-handed route.

The game ball launched toward the right-handed route wins a prize in the through gate 41 provided on the right side of the center of the game board 31, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the prize in the through gate 41 is electric. When the result corresponds to the transition to the open position, the electric accessory 37a provided in the right operating port 37 is opened in a predetermined manner as described above.
When the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a and enters the right operating port 37 along this plate surface. (See FIG. 25 (A)). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball enters the right operating port 37 over time while being shaken by this plate surface. Become. In addition, in FIG. 25 (A), the number of game balls transmitted through the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a is three (B1, B2).

In the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process of the right operating port in step S206 based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. In the closing execution process of the right operating port, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state, as shown in FIG. 25 (B). In other words, in the high probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state when the electric accessory opening lottery is won, and then based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. The electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state.
Therefore, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a and fall.

Further, the MPU 102 starts variable display of a plurality of symbol strings Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, thereby performing high speed. It shifts to a variable period (see FIG. 25 (B)). In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, in the case of a "special loss result" in the winning / failing lottery, the MPU 102 has a stop result based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the lapse of the high-speed fluctuation period, as shown in FIG. 25 (C). As a result, the result of the winning / failing lottery is notified by stopping and displaying a special combination of symbols (“3.4.1” in this embodiment) on the effective line L. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.
Further, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the small hit effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, and plays a game for the player with the line "Yatte!" Of this character. Notify that the result is a "special off result".

In the "special deviation result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the opening / closing number specified mode instead of the round number specified mode, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In this open / close number regulation mode, the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed a predetermined total number of times (twice in this embodiment), or a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls. Ends on the condition that the player has won the big prize opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when the winning / failing lottery mode is determined to be the high probability mode in step S806, the MPU 62 is specially stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 in step S807. Read the display duration. Then, when the special display duration is read, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in the present embodiment) in the display duration counters provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. Therefore, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, the period shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period, and as a result of the stoppage, a special combination of symbols (“3.4.1” in this embodiment). Is stopped and displayed on the valid line L, and the time until the result of the winning / failing lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 hits the timer counter T provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S907. Set "50" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting a small hit is 0.1 sec.

In other words, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, the total time of the special display duration and the waiting time for starting the small hit When a certain 0.2 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the large winning opening 38a in the open state.

Further, the vertical distance between the electric accessory 37a and the large winning opening 38a is about 0.2 sec when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state and the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a falls freely. It is set to reach the big winning opening 38a later. In other words, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a, fall, and can win a prize in the large winning opening 38a (Fig.). 25 (C)). According to this, since the electric accessory 37a and the large winning opening 38a are separated by a predetermined distance, the player can see that after the game ball traveling on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a starts free fall. You can play while enjoying the process of reaching the grand prize opening 38a and whether or not to win the grand prize opening 38a.

Here, as described above, the opening / closing number regulation mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number of game balls (one in the present embodiment) wins the large winning opening 38a. However, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball enters the right operating port 37 over time while being shaken by this plate surface. The electric accessory 37a can hold a plurality of game balls until it is set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can simultaneously win the remaining plurality of game balls that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a into the large winning opening 38a, which makes it easier for the player to win an over prize. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, the electric accessory 37a may hold 3 to 4 game balls until it is set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. It is designed to be able to.

After that, the MPU 62 sets the large winning opening 38a in the closed state as shown in FIG. 25 (D). As a result, the other game ball B launched toward the right-handed route passes through the electric accessory 37a, falls, and then utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening / closing door 38b, and this plate surface is used. Since it will fall toward the out opening 39 (see FIG. 2), it will not be possible to win a prize in the large winning opening 38a.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is located on the vertically lower side of the electric accessory 37a. Then, the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state, and then sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. The remaining game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a is released. Further, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b in an open state so that the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a can enter the large winning opening 38a.

In other words, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state at the timing when the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can insert the remaining game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a into the large winning opening 38a, and the pachinko machine 10 can enter a predetermined game ball at the time of entering the game ball B2. Can be paid out. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the opening / closing door 38b is located on the vertically lower side of the electric accessory 37a, the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b. The game ball B2 released from the above will freely fall and head toward the opening / closing door 38b. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can easily allow the remaining game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a to enter the large winning opening 38a.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a "special loss result" is obtained without being a "big hit" in the winning / losing lottery, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state and then wins a big prize. The opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of the game balls into the mouth 38a. Then, the electric accessory 37a is a plurality of game balls that flow down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the electric accessory 37a (two in the present embodiment) is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. It can be held. Since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball will enter the right operating port 37 over time while being shaken by this plate surface. is there.
According to this, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b in the open state, and then sets the opening / closing door 38b in the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the large winning opening 38a. Since the electric accessory 37a can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls B2 released from the electric accessory 37a is larger than a predetermined number of game balls, the pachinko machine 10 Can enter more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls into the large winning opening 38a, and can facilitate over-winning. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state, and then closes the electric accessory 37a based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. Although it has been set, the electric accessory 37a may be set to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls. In short, the guide piece driving unit may set the guide piece in the open state and then set the guide piece in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. When the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls, the MPU 62 fluctuates when 0.1 sec elapses after setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. It suffices if it is configured to end the display and stop the display.

Further, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state, and then closes the electric accessory 37a based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. Although it has been set, for example, the electric accessory 37a may be set to the closed state based on satisfying other conditions such as the elapse of a predetermined time. In this case, the variable winning drive unit 38c can set the opening / closing door 38b in the open state at the timing corresponding to other conditions for setting the electric accessory 37a in the closed state in the electric accessory drive unit 37b. Good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is located on the vertically lower side of the electric accessory 37a, but is located on the downstream side of the flow path of the game ball that has passed through the electric accessory 37a. If so, it does not have to be located on the vertically lower side of the electric accessory 37a.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a "special loss result" is obtained without being a "big hit" in the winning / losing lottery, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state and then wins a big prize. The opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of the game balls into the mouth 38a, and the electric accessory 37a is the game ball released from the electric accessory 37a. It has become possible to hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number (two in the present embodiment) is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. On the other hand, the electric accessory 37a can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the electric accessory 37a is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. It does not have to be. In other words, the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a does not have to be formed in a wavy shape.

Further, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory 37a and the electric accessory drive unit 37b can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and assist the entry of the game balls into the variable winning device 38. It also functions as an auxiliary means. In this case, the electric accessory 37a functions as an auxiliary main body portion located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball entering the variable winning device 38, and the electric accessory drive unit 37b uses the electric accessory 37a. By driving, it functions as an auxiliary driving unit that is set to a holding state (open state of the electric accessory 37a) or a non-holding state (closed state of the electric accessory 37a).
Then, the electric accessory driving unit 37b holds the plurality of game balls B1 and B2 flowing down the game area by setting the electric accessory 37a in the holding state, and sets the electric accessory 37a in the non-holding state. As a result, the game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a is released so as not to interfere with the game ball flowing down the game area.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory 37a and the electric accessory drive unit 37b are used as the ball entry assisting means, but other mechanical elements may be adopted. In other words, the ball entry assisting means may be configured independently of the starting ball entry means (central actuating port 36 and right actuating port 37). In short, the auxiliary main body may be capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary main body is larger than a predetermined number of game balls.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open / close door 38b to the open state at the timing when the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can insert the remaining game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a into the large winning opening 38a, and the pachinko machine 10 can enter a predetermined game ball when the game ball B2 enters. Can be paid out. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) Since the opening / closing door 38b is located on the vertically lower side of the electric accessory 37a, the electric accessory 37a is released from the electric accessory 37a by setting the electric accessory 37a in the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b. The game ball B2 will fall freely and head toward the opening / closing door 38b. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can easily allow the remaining game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a to enter the large winning opening 38a.
(3) The variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b in the open state, and then sets the opening / closing door 38b in the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the large winning opening 38a. Since the object 37a can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of the game balls B2 released from the electric accessory 37a is larger than the predetermined number of game balls, the pachinko machine 10 can hold a plurality of game balls. It is possible to enter more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls into the large winning opening 38a, and it is possible to facilitate over-winning. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

[Second Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, the special display duration and the waiting time for starting the small hit are set. When the total time of about 0.2 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the large winning opening 38a in the open state, and the vertical distance between the electric accessory 37a and the large winning opening 38a closes the electric accessory 37a. It was set so that when the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a falls freely, it reaches the grand prize opening 38a after about 0.2 sec. In other words, the remaining two game balls B2 that had traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a passed through the electric accessory 37a, fell, and were able to win a prize in the large winning opening 38a.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, the special display duration and the start of the small hit are used. When the total waiting time has elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the large winning opening 38a to the open state and adjusts the waiting time for starting the small hit. In other words, in the present embodiment, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a can pass through the electric accessory 37a, fall, and win the grand prize opening 38a. It differs from the first embodiment in that it is not limited.

FIG. 26 is a front view of the game board in which the vicinity of the right operating port and the variable winning device according to the second embodiment of the present invention is enlarged.
The right operating port 37 includes the electric accessory 37a and the electric accessory drive unit 37b as in the first embodiment, and as shown in FIG. 26, is located vertically above the electric accessory 37a. It includes a guardrail 371 provided and a passage sensor 372 provided on the right side of the guardrail 371.

The guardrail 371 is provided on the game board 31 so that its left end abuts on the upper right end of the right operating port 37 and is inclined so as to descend toward the right operating port 37. Further, the guardrail 371 is provided on the game board 31 so as to be parallel to the electric accessory 37a. The width of the guardrail 371 in the horizontal direction is set to be about half that of the electric accessory 37a. Further, the guardrail 371 protrudes from the game board 31 toward the window panel 22 and is fixed. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down from the vertically upper side of the guardrail 371, for example, the game ball that has passed through the flow path indicated by the arrow A in the figure, utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the guardrail 371 and is operated to the right. It will flow down toward the out port 39 (see FIG. 2) without entering the ball 37. Here, the distance between the electric accessory 37a and the guardrail 371 is wider than that of one game ball. Therefore, the guardrail 371 does not obstruct the flow of the game ball flowing down along the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a.

The passage sensor 372 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball, and is provided on the game board 31 along the horizontal direction so as to be adjacent to the right end of the guardrail 371. The width of the passage sensor 372 in the horizontal direction is set to be about half that of the electric accessory 37a. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down from the vertically upper side of the passage sensor 372, for example, the game ball that has passed through the flow path indicated by the arrow B in the figure, is detected by the passage sensor 372 and then vertically above the electric accessory 37a. It flows down along the plate surface on the side and the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening / closing door 38b. In other words, the passage sensor 372 detects the number of game balls flowing down along the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a. The passage sensor 372 may be any one as long as it can individually detect the passage of the game ball, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be adopted.

<Electrical configuration of voice emission control device 90 and display control device 100>
FIG. 27 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the voice emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 27, the voice emission control device 90 includes a voice emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the voice light emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 constituting the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the ROM 93 and the RAM 94.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the ROM 93, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. Is. The RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a and various counter areas 94b.

The MPU 92 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main control device 60 as described above. Further, the input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the push button 25b and the passage sensor 372. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, a speaker unit 24, and a display control device 100.
The MPU 92 executes drive control of the various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c and the speaker unit 24 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60.
Further, the MPU 92 transmits a command as a result of analyzing these commands to the display control device 100. The voice emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) provided with connectors at both ends of the signal line.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the winning process, the normal process, and the game state transition process for the operating port are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the winning process, the normal process, and the game state transition process for the operating port in the present embodiment will be described.

<Prize processing for operating port>
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a winning process for the operating port.
In the winning process for the operating port, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S209 substantially in the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, the MPU 62 is different from the first embodiment in that the process of step S206A is executed instead of the process of step S206.

In step S206A, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process of the right operating port. In the closing execution process of the right operating port, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a in the closed state. In other words, in the high probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state when the electric accessory opening lottery is won, and then electricly operates based on the entry of the game ball into the right operating port 37. The accessory 37a is set to the closed state.

Here, in the present embodiment, the MPU 62 sets the electric service closing command after setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state in step S206A. This electric function closing command includes information for causing the voice emission control device 90 to recognize that the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state. The MPU 62 transmits the electric service closing command set in step S206A to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state based on the electric function closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
In the normal process, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29, the MPU 62 is different from the first embodiment in that the process of step S306A is executed instead of the process of step S306.

In step S306A, the MPU 62 executes an electric service support process for executing drive control of the electric accessory 37a provided in the right operating port 37. In this electric service support process, the MPU 62 executes the electric accessory opening lottery based on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 64c of the RAM 64, and also performs the electric accessory opening lottery. If it is won, the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 37a is executed. Specifically, when the MPU 62 wins the electric accessory opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a in the open state. Then, after setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state, the MPU 62 drives the electric accessory drive unit 37b when it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed without the game ball winning a prize in the right operating port 37. Control is executed to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. Further, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory opening lottery.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the MPU 62 wins the electric accessory opening lottery in step S306A, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the open state. After that, set the electric service release command. This electric function release command includes information for causing the voice emission control device 90 to recognize that the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state. The MPU 62 transmits the electric service release command set in step S306A to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state based on the electric combination release command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later.

<Game state transition process>
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game state transition process.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S917 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 30, the MPU 62 is different from the first embodiment in that the process of steps S907A and 908A is executed instead of the process of steps S907 and 908.

In step S907A, the MPU 62 executes a process of setting a waiting time for starting a small hit. In this process of setting the waiting time for starting a small hit, the MPU 62 has a 50% probability of setting the timer counter T provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "50" as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting a small hit. Is set, and "200" is set as the standby time (standby period) for starting a small hit in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 with a probability of remaining 50%. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting a small hit is 0.1 sec or 0.4 sec. The waiting time for starting a small hit is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

Further, in the present embodiment, there is a 50% probability that "50" is set as the standby time (standby period) for starting a small hit in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64, but 50%. The timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 may be set to "50" as the standby time (standby period) for starting a small hit with a probability different from that of the above.

In step S908A, the MPU 62 sets a small hit command. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition process. This small hit command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode, and information on the waiting time for starting the small hit. The MPU 62 transmits the small hit command set in step S908A to the voice emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the open / close execution mode based on the small hit command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later.

Further, in the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 90 executes a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the timer interrupt processing and the effect determination processing are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the timer interrupt processing and the effect determination processing in the present embodiment will be described.

<About timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device.
In the timer interrupt process executed by the voice emission control device 90, the MPU 92 executes steps S2001 to S2005 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31, the MPU 92 executes the game ball counting process of step S2006A after executing the process of step S2001 and before executing the process of step S2002. 1 Different from the embodiment.

In step S2006A, the MPU 92 executes the game ball counting process. In this game ball counting process, the MPU 92 counts the number of game balls detected by the passage sensor 372 after setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state. In other words, in the game ball counting process, the MPU 92 counts the number of game balls flowing down along the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a.
Hereinafter, the game ball counting process will be described in detail.

<Game ball counting process>
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game ball counting process.
In the game ball counting process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2201 to S2204 as shown in FIG. 32.

In step S2201, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the electric service release command transmitted from the MPU 62 has been received.
When the MPU 92 determines that the electric service release command has been received in step S2201, the MPU 92 is cleared by substituting 0 for the value of the pass counter PTC provided in various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94 in step S2202. To do. After that, the MPU 92 ends the game ball counting process. Here, the value of the pass counter PTC indicates the number of game balls detected by the pass sensor 372. Therefore, the MPU 92 resets and initializes the value of the passage counter PTC when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state in the MPU 62.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2201 that the MPU 92 has not received the electric service release command, the MPU 92 reads the state of the passage sensor 372 in step S2203, determines the state, and uses it as the passage detection information. Save in RAM 94. Then, based on the detection result of the passage sensor 372 stored in the RAM 94, it is determined whether or not the passage of the game ball is detected.

When the MPU 92 determines that the passage of the game ball is detected in step S2203, the MPU 92 adds 1 to the value of the passage counter PTC and updates it in step S2204.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2203 that the passage of the game ball is not detected, the MPU 92 ends the game ball counting process.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
In the effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2101 to S2116 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33, the MPU 92 executes the processes of steps S2114A and 2115A instead of the processes of steps S2114 and 2115, and before executing the process of step S2113, the process of step S2117A It differs from the first embodiment in that the effect determination process at the time of closing is executed.

In step S2114A, the MPU 92 executes a small hit effect determination process. In this small hit effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects the content of the small hit effect by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93. Specifically, in the process of setting the waiting time for starting a small hit in step S907A, when "50" is set as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting a small hit, the short-term waiting time effect is produced as a small hit. When "200" is set as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small hit, the long-term waiting time effect is selected as the small hit effect.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above based on the content of the selected effect.

In step S2115A, the MPU 92 sets a small hit effect command including information related to the short-term standby time effect or the long-term standby time effect selected in the small hit effect determination process of step S2114A. Then, the MPU 92 stores the small hit effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This small hit effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process in step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the short-term standby time effect or the long-term standby time effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the small hit effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the short-term standby time effect or the long-term standby time effect.

In step S2117A, the MPU 92 executes the closing effect determination process. In this closing effect determining process, the MPU 92 determines the closing effect to be executed when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state.
Hereinafter, the closing effect determination process will be described in detail.

<Processing to determine the production when closed>
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the closing effect determination process.
In the closing effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2301 to S2306 as shown in FIG. 34.

In step S2301, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the electric service closing command transmitted from the MPU 62 has been received.
When the MPU 92 determines that the electric service closing command has been received in step S2301, it determines in step S2302 whether or not the value of the passage counter PTC is "3" or more.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2302 that the value of the pass counter PTC is "3" or more, the MPU 92 executes a determination process of high expectation effect in step S2303. In the determination process of the high expectation effect, the MPU 92 selects the content of the high expectation effect by referring to the table for the effect stored in advance in the ROM 93.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above based on the content of the selected effect.

In step S2304, the MPU 92 sets a high expectation effect command related to the high expectation effect determined in the determination process of the high expectation effect in step S2304. After that, the MPU 92 ends the closing effect determination process. Then, the MPU 92 stores the high expectation effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This high expectation effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process in step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads a data table for executing the high expectation effect on the symbol display device 47 from the program ROM 103 based on the high expectation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the high expectation effect.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2302 that the value of the passage counter PTC is not "3" or more (when it determines that the value of the passage counter PTC is less than "3"), step S2305 In, the determination process of the low expectation effect is executed. In this low expectation effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects the content of the low expectation effect by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above based on the content of the selected effect.

In step S2306, the MPU 92 sets a low expectation effect command related to the low expectation effect determined in the determination process of the low expectation effect in step S2305. After that, the MPU 92 ends the closing effect determination process. Then, the MPU 92 stores the low expectation effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This low expectation effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process in step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads a data table for executing the low expectation effect on the symbol display device 47 from the program ROM 103 based on the low expectation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the low expectation degree effect.

<About the flow after shifting to the high probability mode>
In FIG. 35, after shifting to the high-probability mode, three game balls are transmitted on the plate surface of the electric accessory, and the winning / failing result becomes the “special miss result”, and the waiting time (standby) for starting the small hit. It is a figure which shows the right actuation opening, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device when "50" is set as a period).
In addition, the high probability mode shifts to the case where the winning / losing lottery becomes a "big hit winning" and the distribution lottery is divided into the "explicit small round high probability result" or the "most advantageous result". In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Further, in FIG. 35, the open state of the right operating port 37 and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are shown as solid lines, and the closed state of the right operating port 37 and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are shown as a two-dot chain line.

First, the MPU 102 starts variable display of a plurality of symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, thereby performing high speed. Move to a variable period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, when the winning / failing lottery results in a "big hit" and the lottery is distributed to the "most advantageous result", the MPU 102 is based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number (“7, 7, 7” in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L to notify the result of the winning / failing lottery (FIG. 35 (A)). )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number-specified mode in which the round game is performed with a maximum number of 15 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in a long-time mode.
After the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 35 (A), the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 in order to suggest a right-handed hit to the player.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits the right with the maximum amount of rotation of the launch handle 27, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is the side portion where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed. By shifting from the side of the center to the side of the opposite side, the probability of winning the right operating port 37 can be increased rather than that of the central operating port 36.
Then, when a prize is detected in the right operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of game balls so much. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player can advance the game advantageously by firing the game ball toward the right-handed route.

The game ball launched toward the right-handed route wins a prize in the through gate 41 provided on the right side of the center of the game board 31, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the prize in the through gate 41 is electric. When the result corresponds to the transition to the open position, the electric accessory 37a provided in the right operating port 37 is opened in a predetermined manner as described above.
When the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a and enters the right operating port 37 along this plate surface. (See FIG. 35 (A)). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball enters the right operating port 37 over time while being shaken by this plate surface. Become. In addition, in FIG. 35 (A), there are three game balls (B1, B2) traveling on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a.

In the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process of the right operating port in step S206A based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. In the closing execution process of the right operating port, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state, as shown in FIG. 35 (B). In other words, in the high probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state when the electric accessory opening lottery is won, and then based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. The electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state.
Therefore, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a and fall.

Here, as described above, since the number of game balls traveling on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a is three (B1, B2), the value of the passage counter PTC is “3”.
Therefore, the MPU 92 will execute the high expectation effect determination process of step S2303 in the closing effect determination process of step S2117A.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the high expectation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, and at the same time, the line "great attention!" Notify that the high expectation of winning the grand prize opening 38a is high.

If the predetermined time elapses without the game ball winning the right operating port 37, the MPU 92 determines in step S2301 that the electric service closing command has not been received. The production (high expectation production and low expectation production) will not be executed.

Further, the MPU 102 starts variable display of a plurality of symbol strings Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, thereby performing high speed. It shifts to a variable period (see FIG. 35 (B)). In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, in the case of a "special loss result" in the winning / failing lottery, the MPU 102 has a stop result based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the lapse of the high-speed fluctuation period, as shown in FIG. 35 (C). As a result, the result of the winning / failing lottery is notified by stopping and displaying a special combination of symbols (“3.4.1” in this embodiment) on the effective line L. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

Further, in the example of FIG. 35, since the MPU 62 sets “50” as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small hit, the MPU 102 is short-term based on the small hit effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Execute the waiting time production. In the short-term standby time production, the MPU 102 displays the character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and also displays the line "Yeah!" Of this character. Further, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image of the large winning opening 38a in the open state. As a result, the short-term waiting time effect informs the player that the player is highly expected to win the grand prize opening 38a.

In the "special deviation result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the opening / closing number specified mode instead of the round number specified mode, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In this open / close number regulation mode, the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed a predetermined total number of times (twice in this embodiment), or a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls. Ends on the condition that the player has won the big prize opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when the winning / failing lottery mode is determined to be the high probability mode in step S806, the MPU 62 is specially stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 in step S807. Read the display duration. Then, when the special display duration is read, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in the present embodiment) in the display duration counters provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. Therefore, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, the period shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period, and as a result of the stoppage, a special combination of symbols (“3.4.1” in this embodiment). Is stopped and displayed on the valid line L, and the time until the result of the winning / failing lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 hits the timer counter T provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S907A. Set "50" or "200" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, in FIG. 35, since the MPU 62 sets “50” as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small hit, the waiting time for starting the small hit is 0.1 sec.

In other words, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, the total time of the special display duration and the waiting time for starting the small hit. When about 0.2 sec is elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the large winning opening 38a in the open state.

Further, the vertical distance between the electric accessory 37a and the large winning opening 38a is about 0.2 sec when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state and the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a falls freely. It is set to reach the big winning opening 38a later. In other words, when "50" is set as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting a small hit in the MPU 62, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a are It passes through the electric accessory 37a, falls, and can win a prize in the large winning opening 38a (see FIG. 35 (C)). According to this, since the electric accessory 37a and the large winning opening 38a are separated by a predetermined distance, the player can see that after the game ball traveling on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a starts free fall. You can play while enjoying the process of reaching the grand prize opening 38a and whether or not to win the grand prize opening 38a.

After that, the MPU 62 sets the large winning opening 38a in the closed state as shown in FIG. 35 (D). As a result, the other game ball B launched toward the right-handed route passes through the electric accessory 37a, falls, and then utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening / closing door 38b, and this plate surface is used. Since it will fall toward the out opening 39 (see FIG. 2), it will not be possible to win a prize in the large winning opening 38a.

In FIG. 36, after shifting to the high-probability mode, two game balls are transmitted on the plate surface of the electric accessory, and the winning / failing result becomes the “special miss result”, and the waiting time (standby) for starting the small hit. It is a figure which shows the right actuation opening, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device when "50" is set as a period).
In addition, the high probability mode shifts to the case where the winning / losing lottery becomes a "big hit winning" and the distribution lottery is divided into the "explicit small round high probability result" or the "most advantageous result". In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Further, in FIG. 36, the open state of the right operating port 37 and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are shown as solid lines, and the closed state of the right operating port 37 and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are shown as a two-dot chain line.

First, the MPU 102 starts variable display of a plurality of symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, thereby performing high speed. Move to a variable period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, when the winning / failing lottery results in a "big hit" and the lottery is distributed to the "most advantageous result", the MPU 102 is based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number (“7, 7, 7” in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L to notify the result of the winning / failing lottery (FIG. 36 (A)). )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number-specified mode in which the round game is performed with a maximum number of 15 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in a long-time mode.
After the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 36 (A), the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 in order to suggest a right-handed hit to the player.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits the right with the maximum amount of rotation of the launch handle 27, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is the side portion where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed. By shifting from the side of the center to the side of the opposite side, the probability of winning the right operating port 37 can be increased rather than that of the central operating port 36.
Then, when a prize is detected in the right operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of game balls so much. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player can advance the game advantageously by firing the game ball toward the right-handed route.

The game ball launched toward the right-handed route wins a prize in the through gate 41 provided on the right side of the center of the game board 31, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the prize in the through gate 41 is electric. When the result corresponds to the transition to the open position, the electric accessory 37a provided in the right operating port 37 is opened in a predetermined manner as described above.
When the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a and enters the right operating port 37 along this plate surface. (See FIG. 36 (A)). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball enters the right operating port 37 over time while being shaken by this plate surface. Become. In addition, in FIG. 36 (A), there are two game balls (B1, B2) traveling on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a.

In the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process of the right operating port in step S206A based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. In the closing execution process of the right operating port, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state, as shown in FIG. In other words, in the high probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state when the electric accessory opening lottery is won, and then based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. The electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state.
Therefore, the remaining one game ball B2 that has traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a passes through the electric accessory 37a and falls.

Here, as described above, since the number of game balls traveling on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a is two (B1, B2), the value of the passage counter PTC is “2”.
Therefore, the MPU 92 will execute the determination process of the low expectation effect of step S2305 in the closing effect determination process of step S2117A.
Further, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the low expectation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, and at the same time, the line "Attention!" Notifies that the expectation of winning a prize in the winning opening 38a is low.

Further, the MPU 102 starts variable display of a plurality of symbol strings Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, thereby performing high speed. It shifts to a variable period (see FIG. 36B). In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, in the case of a "special loss result" in the winning / failing lottery, the MPU 102 has a stop result based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the lapse of the high-speed fluctuation period, as shown in FIG. 36 (C). As a result, the result of the winning / failing lottery is notified by stopping and displaying a special combination of symbols (“3.4.1” in this embodiment) on the effective line L. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

Further, in the example of FIG. 36, since the MPU 62 sets “50” as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small hit, the MPU 102 is short-term based on the small hit effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Execute the waiting time production. In the short-term standby time production, the MPU 102 displays the character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and also displays the line "Yeah!" Of this character. Further, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image of the large winning opening 38a in the open state. As a result, the short-term waiting time effect informs the player that the player is highly expected to win the grand prize opening 38a.

In the "special deviation result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the opening / closing number specified mode instead of the round number specified mode, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In this open / close number regulation mode, the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed a predetermined total number of times (twice in this embodiment), or a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls. Ends on the condition that the player has won the big prize opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when the winning / failing lottery mode is determined to be the high probability mode in step S806, the MPU 62 is specially stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 in step S807. Read the display duration. Then, when the special display duration is read, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in the present embodiment) in the display duration counters provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. Therefore, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, the period shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period, and as a result of the stoppage, a special combination of symbols (“3.4.1” in this embodiment). Is stopped and displayed on the valid line L, and the time until the result of the winning / failing lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 hits the timer counter T provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S907A. Set "50" or "200" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, in FIG. 36, since the MPU 62 sets “50” as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small hit, the waiting time for starting the small hit is 0.1 sec.

In other words, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, the total time of the special display duration and the waiting time for starting the small hit. When about 0.2 sec is elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the large winning opening 38a in the open state.

Further, the vertical distance between the electric accessory 37a and the large winning opening 38a is about 0.2 sec when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state and the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a falls freely. It is set to reach the big winning opening 38a later. In other words, when "50" is set as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting a small hit in the MPU 62, the remaining one game ball B2 that has traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a is It passes through the electric accessory 37a, falls, and can win a prize in the large winning opening 38a (see FIG. 36 (C)). According to this, since the electric accessory 37a and the large winning opening 38a are separated by a predetermined distance, the player can see that after the game ball traveling on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a starts free fall. You can play while enjoying the process of reaching the grand prize opening 38a and whether or not to win the grand prize opening 38a.

After that, the MPU 62 sets the large winning opening 38a in the closed state as shown in FIG. 36 (D). As a result, the other game ball B launched toward the right-handed route passes through the electric accessory 37a, falls, and then utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening / closing door 38b, and this plate surface is used. Since it will fall toward the out opening 39 (see FIG. 2), it will not be possible to win a prize in the large winning opening 38a.

In FIG. 37, after shifting to the high-probability mode, three game balls are transmitted on the plate surface of the electric accessory, and the winning / failing result becomes the “special miss result”, and the waiting time (standby) for starting the small hit. It is a figure which shows the right actuation opening, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device when "200" is set as a period).
In addition, the high probability mode shifts to the case where the winning / losing lottery becomes a "big hit winning" and the distribution lottery is divided into the "explicit small round high probability result" or the "most advantageous result". In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Further, in FIG. 37, the open state of the right operating port 37 and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are shown as solid lines, and the closed state of the right operating port 37 and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are shown as a two-dot chain line.

First, the MPU 102 starts variable display of a plurality of symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, thereby performing high speed. Move to a variable period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, when the winning / failing lottery results in a "big hit" and the lottery is distributed to the "most advantageous result", the MPU 102 is based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number (“7, 7, 7” in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L to notify the result of the winning / failing lottery (FIG. 37 (A)). )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number-specified mode in which the round game is performed with a maximum number of 15 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in a long-time mode.
After the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 37 (A), the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 in order to suggest a right-handed hit to the player.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits the right with the maximum amount of rotation of the launch handle 27, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is the side portion where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed. By shifting from the side of the center to the side of the opposite side, the probability of winning the right operating port 37 can be increased rather than that of the central operating port 36.
Then, when a prize is detected in the right operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of game balls so much. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player can advance the game advantageously by firing the game ball toward the right-handed route.

The game ball launched toward the right-handed route wins a prize in the through gate 41 provided on the right side of the center of the game board 31, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the prize in the through gate 41 is electric. When the result corresponds to the transition to the open position, the electric accessory 37a provided in the right operating port 37 is opened in a predetermined manner as described above.
When the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a and enters the right operating port 37 along this plate surface. (See FIG. 37 (A)). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball enters the right operating port 37 over time while being shaken by this plate surface. Become. In FIG. 37 (A), there are three game balls (B1, B2) traveling on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a.

In the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process of the right operating port in step S206A based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. In the closing execution process of the right operating port, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state, as shown in FIG. 37 (B). In other words, in the high probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state when the electric accessory opening lottery is won, and then based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. The electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state.
Therefore, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a and fall.

Here, as described above, since the number of game balls traveling on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a is three (B1, B2), the value of the passage counter PTC is “3”.
Therefore, the MPU 92 will execute the high expectation effect determination process of step S2303 in the closing effect determination process of step S2117A.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the high expectation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, and at the same time, the line "great attention!" Notify that the high expectation of winning the grand prize opening 38a is high.

Further, the MPU 102 starts variable display of a plurality of symbol strings Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, thereby performing high speed. It shifts to a variable period (see FIG. 37 (B)). In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, in the case of a "special loss result" in the winning / failing lottery, the MPU 102 has a stop result based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the lapse of the high-speed fluctuation period, as shown in FIG. 37 (C). As a result, the result of the winning / failing lottery is notified by stopping and displaying a special combination of symbols (“3.4.1” in this embodiment) on the effective line L. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

Further, in the example of FIG. 37, since the MPU 62 sets “200” as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small hit, the MPU 102 has a long term based on the small hit effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Execute the waiting time production. In the long-term standby time effect, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and also displays the line "Zannen!" Of this character. Further, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image of the large winning opening 38a in the closed state. As a result, the long-term waiting time effect informs the player that the expectation of winning the large winning opening 38a is low.

In the "special deviation result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the opening / closing number specified mode instead of the round number specified mode, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In this open / close number regulation mode, the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed a predetermined total number of times (twice in this embodiment), or a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls. Ends on the condition that the player has won the big prize opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when the winning / failing lottery mode is determined to be the high probability mode in step S806, the MPU 62 is specially stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 in step S807. Read the display duration. Then, when the special display duration is read, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in the present embodiment) in the display duration counters provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. Therefore, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, the period shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period, and as a result of the stoppage, a special combination of symbols (“3.4.1” in this embodiment). Is stopped and displayed on the valid line L, and the time until the result of the winning / failing lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 hits the timer counter T provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S907A. Set "50" or "200" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, in FIG. 37, since the MPU 62 sets “200” as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small hit, the waiting time for starting the small hit is 0.4 sec.

In other words, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, the total time of the special display duration and the waiting time for starting the small hit. When about 0.5 sec is elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the large winning opening 38a in the open state.

Further, the vertical distance between the electric accessory 37a and the large winning opening 38a is about 0.2 sec when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state and the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a falls freely. It is set to reach the big winning opening 38a later. In other words, when "200" is set as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting a small hit in the MPU 62, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a are It passes through the electric accessory 37a and falls so that it cannot win a prize in the large winning opening 38a (see FIG. 37 (C)). According to this, since the electric accessory 37a and the large winning opening 38a are separated by a predetermined distance, the player can see that after the game ball traveling on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a starts free fall. You can play while enjoying the process of reaching the grand prize opening 38a and whether or not to win the grand prize opening 38a.

After that, the MPU 62 sets the large winning opening 38a in the open state as shown in FIG. 37 (D). As a result, the other game ball B launched toward the right-handed route can pass through the electric accessory 37a, fall, and win the grand prize opening 38a.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is located on the vertically lower side of the electric accessory 37a. Then, the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state, and then sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. The remaining game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a is released.
Further, when "50" is set as the standby time (standby period) for starting the small hit in the MPU 62, the variable winning drive unit 38c uses the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a as the large winning opening 38a. The opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state so that the ball can enter the ball.
On the other hand, when "200" is set as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small hit in the MPU 62, the variable winning drive unit 38c makes the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a large. The opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state so that the ball does not enter the winning opening 38a.

In other words, the variable winning drive unit 38c is an electric first opening time that sets the opening / closing door 38b in an open state so that the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a enters the large winning opening 38a. It is provided with a second opening time for setting the opening / closing door 38b in an open state so that the game ball B2 released from the accessory 37a does not enter the large winning opening 38a.
According to this, the pachinko machine 10 has a first opening time for setting the opening / closing door 38b in an open state so that the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a can enter the large winning opening 38a, and a large winning prize. Setting the opening / closing door 38b to the open state so as not to let the ball enter the mouth 38a Since the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state at any time of the second opening time, the player is released from the electric accessory 37a. Attention will be paid to whether or not the pachinko ball B2 enters the large winning opening 38a. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In the present embodiment, the first opening time is set to the closed state of the electric accessory 37a by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, and then the special display duration and the special display duration and It was set when about 0.2 sec, which is the total waiting time for starting a small hit, has elapsed, but it may be set when a time other than this has elapsed. In short, the first opening time may be such that the opening / closing door 38b can be set to the open state so that the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a enters the large winning opening 38a.
Further, in the present embodiment, the second opening time is set to the closed state of the electric accessory 37a by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, and then the special display duration and the special display duration and It was set when about 0.5 sec, which is the total waiting time for starting a small hit, has elapsed, but it may be set when a time other than this has elapsed. In short, as the second opening time, it is sufficient that the opening / closing door 38b can be set to the open state so that the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a does not enter the large winning opening 38a.

Then, in the pachinko machine 10, after the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state by the variable winning drive unit 38c (special display). The step S907A includes a process of setting the waiting time for starting the small hit (period adjusting means) for adjusting the duration and the total time of the waiting time for starting the small hit.
According to this, the player sets the electric accessory 37a in the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b, and then sets the opening / closing door 38b in the open state by the variable winning drive unit 38c during the relay period. It will be noticed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In the present embodiment, the period adjusting means selects either the first open time or the second open time to adjust the relay period, but any of three or more times is used. You may select and adjust the relay period, or you may set a random time to adjust the relay period.
Further, in the present embodiment, the period adjusting means sets the electric accessory 37a in the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b by adjusting the standby time for starting the small hit, and then the variable winning drive unit 38c. The relay period until the opening / closing door 38b was set to the open state was adjusted, but for example, the display duration on the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47, and the vertical of the electric accessory 37a and the grand prize opening 38a. The relay period may be adjusted by adjusting the distance or the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, when "50" is set as the standby time (standby period) for starting a small hit in the MPU 62, the variable winning drive unit 38c is the electric accessory drive unit 37b. The opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state at the timing when 37a is set to the closed state. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can insert the remaining game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a into the large winning opening 38a, and the pachinko machine 10 can enter a predetermined game ball at the time of entering the game ball B2. Can be paid out. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the opening / closing door 38b is located on the vertically lower side of the electric accessory 37a, the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b. The game ball B2 released from the above will freely fall and head toward the opening / closing door 38b. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can easily allow the remaining game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a to enter the large winning opening 38a.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a "special loss result" is obtained without being a "big hit" in the winning / losing lottery, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state and then wins a big prize. The opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of the game balls into the mouth 38a. Then, the electric accessory 37a is a plurality of game balls that flow down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the electric accessory 37a (two in the present embodiment) is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. It can be held. Since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball will enter the right operating port 37 over time while being shaken by this plate surface. is there.
According to this, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b in the open state, and then sets the opening / closing door 38b in the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the large winning opening 38a. Since the electric accessory 37a can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls B2 released from the electric accessory 37a is larger than a predetermined number of game balls, the pachinko machine 10 Can enter more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls into the large winning opening 38a, and can facilitate over-winning. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state, and then closes the electric accessory 37a based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. Although it has been set, the electric accessory 37a may be set to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls. In short, the guide piece driving unit may set the guide piece in the open state and then set the guide piece in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. When the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls, the MPU 62 fluctuates when 0.1 sec elapses after setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. It suffices if it is configured to end the display and stop the display.

Further, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state, and then closes the electric accessory 37a based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. Although it has been set, for example, the electric accessory 37a may be set to the closed state based on satisfying other conditions such as the elapse of a predetermined time. In this case, the variable winning drive unit 38c can set the opening / closing door 38b in the open state at the timing corresponding to other conditions for setting the electric accessory 37a in the closed state in the electric accessory drive unit 37b. Good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is located on the vertically lower side of the electric accessory 37a, but is located on the downstream side of the flow path of the game ball that has passed through the electric accessory 37a. If so, it does not have to be located on the vertically lower side of the electric accessory 37a.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a "special loss result" is obtained without being a "big hit" in the winning / losing lottery, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state and then wins a big prize. The opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of the game balls into the mouth 38a, and the electric accessory 37a is the game ball released from the electric accessory 37a. It has become possible to hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number (two in the present embodiment) is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. On the other hand, the electric accessory 37a can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the electric accessory 37a is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. It does not have to be. In other words, the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a does not have to be formed in a wavy shape.

Further, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory 37a and the electric accessory drive unit 37b can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and assist the entry of the game balls into the variable winning device 38. It also functions as an auxiliary means. In this case, the electric accessory 37a functions as an auxiliary main body portion located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball entering the variable winning device 38, and the electric accessory drive unit 37b uses the electric accessory 37a. By driving, it functions as an auxiliary driving unit that is set to a holding state (open state of the electric accessory 37a) or a non-holding state (closed state of the electric accessory 37a).
Then, the electric accessory driving unit 37b holds the plurality of game balls B1 and B2 flowing down the game area by setting the electric accessory 37a in the holding state, and sets the electric accessory 37a in the non-holding state. As a result, the game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a is released so as not to interfere with the game ball flowing down the game area.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory 37a and the electric accessory drive unit 37b are used as the ball entry assisting means, but other mechanical elements may be adopted. In other words, the ball entry assisting means may be configured independently of the starting ball entry means (central actuating port 36 and right actuating port 37). In short, the auxiliary main body may be capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary main body is larger than a predetermined number of game balls.

Further, in the present embodiment, the closing effect determination process of step S2117A executes a predetermined effect (closing effect) when the electric accessory driving unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. It functions as a means of executing time production.
According to this, the pachinko machine 10 includes the closing effect determining process of step S2117A for executing a predetermined effect when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the electric accessory driving unit 37b. For example, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b, the player executes a predetermined effect to determine whether the electric accessory 37a is in an advantageous state or a disadvantageous state. Can be notified to. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the high expectation effect is achieved by setting the electric accessory 37a in the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b, so that the number of game balls exceeds a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment). When there is a high degree of expectation that the ball will enter the large winning opening 38a (when it becomes an advantageous state for the player), it functions as an advantageous state notification effect for notifying the player that the state will be advantageous for the player. Then, in the present embodiment, in the low expectation effect, by setting the electric accessory 37a in the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b, more game balls than a predetermined number are entered into the large winning opening 38a. When the degree of expectation is low (when the player is in a disadvantageous state), it functions as a disadvantage state notification effect for notifying the player that the player is in a disadvantageous state.

According to this, the closing effect determination process of step S2117A is performed by the electric accessory driving unit 37b when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, which is advantageous for the player. When the player is in a disadvantageous state by executing a high expectation effect for notifying the player that the state will be advantageous and setting the electric accessory 37a in the closed state in the electric accessory drive unit 37b. In addition, since the low expectation effect that notifies the player that the player will be in a disadvantageous state is executed, the player pays attention to the closing effect executed in the closing effect determination process of step S2117A. become.

In the present embodiment, the closing effect executing means provides information (expectation degree) regarding whether or not more game balls than a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) are entered into the large winning opening 38a. Although it was notified to the player, it may be configured to notify the player of other information. For example, the closing effect executing means may notify the player of information regarding whether or not the game ball can be entered into the large winning opening 38a. In this case, the closing effect executing means is based on information such as the number of game balls traveling on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a, the waiting time for starting a small hit, and the special display duration. It may be judged whether or not the ball can be entered into the large winning opening 38a.

According to such an embodiment, in addition to being able to exert substantially the same effects as those of the first embodiment, the following actions / effects can be obtained.
(4) The pachinko machine 10 has a first opening time for setting the opening / closing door 38b in an open state so that the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a can enter the large winning opening 38a, and the large winning opening 38a. The opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state so as not to enter the ball. Since the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state at any time of the second opening time, the player can play the game released from the electric accessory 37a. Attention will be paid to whether or not the ball B2 enters the large winning opening 38a. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(5) The electric accessory drive unit 37b releases the game ball held by the electric accessory 37a by setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state and then setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. In the pachinko machine 10, the relay period (special display) from the setting of the electric accessory 37a to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b to the setting of the opening / closing door 38b by the variable winning drive unit 38c (special display). Since the player is provided with the waiting time setting process (period adjusting means) for starting the small hit in step S907A for adjusting the duration and the total waiting time for starting the small hit, the player can use the electric accessory drive unit. Attention will be paid to the relay period from setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state at 37b until the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state at the variable winning drive unit 38c. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(6) The pachinko machine 10 includes, for example, a closing effect determining process in step S2117A for executing a predetermined effect when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the electric accessory driving unit 37b. After setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b, the player is notified by executing a predetermined effect as to whether the electric accessory 37a is in an advantageous state or a disadvantageous state. can do. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(7) The closing effect determination process of step S2117A is advantageous for the player when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the electric accessory driving unit 37b, which is advantageous for the player. When a high expectation effect is executed to notify the player that the state will be reached and the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b, which is disadvantageous to the player. Since the low expectation effect that notifies the player that the state is disadvantageous to the player is executed, the player pays attention to the closing effect executed in the closing effect determination process of step S2117A. ..
(8) In the closing effect determination process of step S2117A, the electric accessory driving unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a in the closed state, so that more game balls than a predetermined number are entered into the large winning opening 38a. When the expectation is high, the high expectation effect is executed, and the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b, so that more game balls than a predetermined number can be placed in the large winning opening 38a. Since the low expectation effect is executed when the expectation of entering the ball is low, the player pays attention to the closing effect executed in the closing effect determination process of step S2117A.

[Third Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 38 is a front view of the game board in which the vicinity of the right operating port and the variable winning device according to the third embodiment of the present invention is enlarged.
In the first embodiment, the right operating port 37 has an electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) formed of a substantially flat plate-shaped movable piece having a wavy plate surface on the vertically upper side. Was there.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38, the right operating port 37B is a guide piece (support piece) formed of a substantially flat plate-shaped movable piece having a wavy plate surface on the vertically upper side. ), And the lower electric accessory 37a2 as a guide piece (support piece) which is arranged vertically below the upper electric accessory 37a1 and is composed of a substantially flat movable piece. It is different from the first embodiment in that it has.

The player hits the right with the maximum amount of rotation of the launch handle 27, and sets the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side of the side portion, the game ball can be guided to the right operating port 37B while avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like.

The upper electric accessory 37a1 is provided so as to be inclined so as to descend toward the right operating port 37B, and is connected to the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 mounted on the back side of the game board 31. The upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to either a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) or an open state (supported state or guided state) by being driven by the upper electric accessory driving unit 37b1. To. The closed state is a state in which the right operating port 37B is closed so that the game ball is not allowed to enter the right operating port 37B by retracting the upper electric accessory 37a1 toward the inside of the game board 31. In the open state, the upper electric accessory 37a1 is advanced toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31, so that the game ball is inserted into the right operating port 37B and the right operating port 37B is opened. Is.

The lower electric accessory 37a2 is provided so as to be inclined so as to descend toward the right operating port 37B, and is connected to the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 mounted on the back side of the game board 31. .. The lower electric accessory 37a2 is driven by the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 to be in either a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) or an open state (supported state or guided state). Set. The closed state is a state in which the lower electric accessory 37a2 is retracted toward the inside of the game board 31 so that the game ball is not allowed to enter the right operating port 37B and the right operating port 37B is closed. In the open state, the lower electric accessory 37a2 is advanced toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31, so that the game ball is inserted into the right operating port 37B and the right operating port 37B is opened. It is in a state.

Here, when both the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 are set to the closed state, the game ball passes through the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 and falls. It will be.
Further, when the upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to the open state, the game ball utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the upper electric accessory 37a1 and travels along this plate surface to the right operating port 37B. It will enter the ball. At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the upper electric accessory 37a1 is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball enters the right operating port 37B over time while being shaken by this plate surface. become.
Further, when the lower electric accessory 37a2 is set to the open state and the upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to the closed state, the game ball tilts the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the lower electric accessory 37a2. It will be used to enter the right operating port 37B along this plate surface. At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the lower electric accessory 37a2 is formed in a flat shape, the game ball immediately enters the right operating port 37B without taking time.
Therefore, when both the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 are set to the closed state, the game ball cannot win the right operating port 37B, and the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a1 cannot be won. When the accessory 37a2 is set to the open state, the right operating port 37B can be won.
When the upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to the open state, the lower electric accessory 37a2 may be set to the open state or may be set to the closed state.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 39 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 39, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a voice emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a payout control device 70 that executes payout control that causes the above-mentioned payout device 71 to pay out the game ball, and a power supply that executes launch control that causes the above-mentioned game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch the game ball. A launch control device 80 is provided, and these devices are mounted on a back pack unit.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 60 includes a board box for accommodating the main control board 61 and the like. The substrate box may be provided with a trace means that leaves a trace when the substrate box is opened, or may be provided with a trace structure that leaves a trace when the substrate box is opened. Specifically, as a trace means, a substrate box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion when separating each case body is provided or peeled off. At this time, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of peeling due to the adhesive layer remaining on the bonding target is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies can be adopted.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61, and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 constituting the MPU 62. Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the ROM 63 and the RAM 64.
In the present embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but they may be individually chipped. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 60.

The MPU 62 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main control device 60 and a plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the voice emission control device 90. Further, the output port of the MPU 62 has an upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 for opening and closing the upper electric accessory 37a1 of the right operating port 37B and a lower electric accessory 37a2 for opening and closing the lower electric accessory 37a2 of the right operating port 37B. The object drive unit 37b2, the variable winning drive unit 38c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38, the main display unit 45, and the accessory display unit 46 are connected to each other.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the winning process and the normal process for the operating port are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the winning process and the normal process for the operating port in the present embodiment will be described.

<Prize processing for operating port>
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a winning process for the operating port.
In the winning process for the operating port, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S209 substantially in the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, the MPU 62 is different from the first embodiment in that the process of step S206B is executed instead of the process of step S206.

In step S206B, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process of the right operating port. In the closing execution process of the right operating port, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 to perform both the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2. Set to closed state. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S207.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
In the normal process, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41, the MPU 62 is different from the first embodiment in that the electric service support process of step S306B is executed instead of the process of step S306.

In step S306B, the MPU 62 executes an electric service support process for executing drive control of the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 provided in the right operating port 37B.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing for electric service support.
In the electric service support process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1301 to S1307 as shown in FIG. 42.
In step S1301, the MPU 62 executes the electric accessory opening lottery based on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 64c of the RAM 64.

In step S1302, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the electric accessory opening lottery has been won.
When it is determined in step S1302 that the MPU 62 has not won the electric accessory opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1307.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1302 that the MPU 62 has won the electric accessory opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes the upper electric accessory lottery in step S1303. In this upper electric accessory lottery, when the electric accessory opening lottery is won, whether or not to set the upper electric accessory 37a1 in the open state is drawn. Specifically, in the upper electric accessory lottery, there is a 50% chance of winning and the remaining 50% of non-winning.
In the present embodiment, in the upper electric accessory lottery, the winning is achieved with a probability of 50%, but the winning may be achieved with a probability different from 50%.

In step S1304, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper electric accessory lottery has been won.
When the MPU 62 determines that the upper electric accessory lottery has been won in step S1304, the MPU 62 executes the upper electric accessory opening execution process in step S1305. In this upper electric accessory opening execution process, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the upper electric accessory driving unit 37b1 to set the upper electric accessory 37a1 in the open state.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1304 that the MPU 62 has not won the upper electric accessory lottery, the MPU 62 executes the lower electric accessory opening execution process in step S1306. In this lower electric accessory opening execution process, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 to set the lower electric accessory 37a2 in the open state.

After executing the process of step S1305 or step S1306, and when it is determined in step S1302 that the lottery for opening the electric accessory has not been won, the processes of step S1307 and subsequent steps are executed.
In step S1307, the MPU 62 performs other processing. In other processing, for example, after setting the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the open state, the MPU 62 determines that a predetermined time has elapsed without the game ball winning a prize in the right operating port 37B. In this case, the drive control of the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 is executed to set both the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the closed state. Further, for example, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory opening lottery. After that, the MPU 62 ends the electric service support process.

<About the flow after shifting to the high probability mode>
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a right operating port, a variable winning device, and a symbol display device when the winning / failing result becomes a “special loss result” after shifting to the high probability mode and the upper electric accessory lottery is won. is there.
In addition, the high probability mode shifts to the case where the winning / losing lottery becomes a "big hit winning" and the distribution lottery is divided into the "explicit small round high probability result" or the "most advantageous result". In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Further, in FIG. 43, the open state of the right operating port 37B (each electric accessory 37a1, 37a2) and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are shown as solid lines, and the right operating port 37B (each electric accessory 37a1, 37a2) is closed. The state and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are shown as a two-dot chain line.

First, the MPU 102 starts variable display of a plurality of symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, thereby performing high speed. Move to a variable period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, when the winning / failing lottery results in a "big hit" and the lottery is distributed to the "most advantageous result", the MPU 102 is based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number (“7, 7, 7” in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L to notify the result of the winning / failing lottery (FIG. 43 (A)). )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number-specified mode in which the round game is performed with a maximum number of 15 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in a long-time mode.
After the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 43 (A), the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 in order to suggest the player to hit right.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player strikes to the right with the maximum amount of rotation of the launch handle 27, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is set to the side portion where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed. By shifting from the side of the center to the side of the opposite side, the probability of winning the right operating port 37B can be increased rather than that of the central operating port 36.
Then, when a prize is detected in the right operating port 37B, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of game balls so much. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player can advance the game advantageously by firing the game ball toward the right-handed route.

The game ball launched toward the right-handed route wins a prize in the through gate 41 provided on the right side of the center of the game board 31, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the prize in the through gate 41 is electric. When the upper electric accessory lottery in step S1303 is won as a result of the transition to the open combination state, as described above, the upper electric accessory 37a1 provided in the right operating port 37B is predetermined. It becomes an open state in the mode of.
When the upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the upper electric accessory 37a1 and enters the right operating port 37B along this plate surface. (See FIG. 43 (A)). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the upper electric accessory 37a1 is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball enters the right operating port 37B over time while being shaken by this plate surface. become. In addition, in FIG. 43A, the number of game balls propagating on the plate surface of the upper electric accessory 37a1 is three (B1, B2).

In the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process of the right operating port in step S206B based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37B. In the closing execution process of the right operating port, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 to set the upper electric accessory 37a1 to the closed state as shown in FIG. 43 (B). In other words, in the high probability mode, the MPU 62 wins the electric accessory open lottery, sets the upper electric accessory 37a1 to the open state when it wins the upper electric accessory lottery in step S1303, and then operates right. The upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the mouth 37B.
Therefore, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the upper electric accessory 37a1 pass through the upper electric accessory 37a1 and fall.

Further, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37B, the MPU 102 displays a plurality of symbols displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By starting the variation display of columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4), the period shifts to the high-speed variation period (see FIG. 43 (B)). In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, in the case of a "special loss result" in the winning / failing lottery, the MPU 102 has a stop result based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the lapse of the high-speed fluctuation period, as shown in FIG. As a result, the result of the winning / failing lottery is notified by stopping and displaying a special combination of symbols (“3.4.1” in this embodiment) on the effective line L. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.
Further, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the small hit effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, and plays a game for the player with the line "Yatte!" Of this character. Notify that the result is a "special off result".

In the "special deviation result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the opening / closing number specified mode instead of the round number specified mode, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In this open / close number regulation mode, the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed a predetermined total number of times (twice in this embodiment), or a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls. Ends on the condition that the player has won the big prize opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when the winning / failing lottery mode is determined to be the high probability mode in step S806, the MPU 62 is specially stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 in step S807. Read the display duration. Then, when the special display duration is read, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in the present embodiment) in the display duration counters provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. Therefore, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37B, the period shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period, and as a result of the stoppage, a special combination of symbols (“3.4.1” in this embodiment). Is stopped and displayed on the valid line L, and the time until the result of the winning / failing lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 hits the timer counter T provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S907. Set "50" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting a small hit is 0.1 sec.

In other words, after the upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37B, the total of the special display duration and the waiting time for starting the small hit. When the time of about 0.2 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the large winning opening 38a to the open state.

Further, the vertical distance between the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the large winning opening 38a is about when the upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to the closed state and the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the upper electric accessory 37a1 falls freely. It is set to reach the big winning opening 38a after 0.2 sec. In other words, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the upper electric accessory 37a1 pass through the upper electric accessory 37a1 and fall to win a prize in the large winning opening 38a. (See FIG. 43 (C)). According to this, since the electric accessory 37a and the large winning opening 38a are separated by a predetermined distance, the player can see that after the game ball traveling on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a starts free fall. You can play while enjoying the process of reaching the grand prize opening 38a and whether or not to win the grand prize opening 38a.

Here, as described above, the opening / closing number regulation mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number of game balls (one in the present embodiment) wins the large winning opening 38a. However, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the upper electric accessory 37a1 is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball enters the right operating port 37B over time while being shaken on this plate surface. Therefore, the upper electric accessory 37a1 can hold a plurality of game balls until it is set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37B. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can simultaneously win the remaining plurality of game balls that have traveled along the plate surface of the upper electric accessory 37a1 into the large winning opening 38a, which makes it easier for the player to win over. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, the upper electric accessory 37a1 holds 3 to 4 game balls until it is set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37B. It is designed to be able to.

After that, the MPU 62 sets the large winning opening 38a in the closed state as shown in FIG. 43 (D). As a result, the other game ball B launched toward the right-handed route passes through the upper electric accessory 37a1 and falls, and then utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening / closing door 38b to use this plate. Since it will fall down the surface toward the out opening 39 (see FIG. 2), it will not be possible to win a prize in the large winning opening 38a.

FIG. 44 shows a right operating port, a variable winning device, and a symbol display device when the winning / failing result becomes a “special loss result” and the upper electric accessory lottery is not won after shifting to the high probability mode. It is a figure.
In addition, the high probability mode shifts to the case where the winning / losing lottery becomes a "big hit winning" and the distribution lottery is divided into the "explicit small round high probability result" or the "most advantageous result". In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Further, in FIG. 44, the open state of the right operating port 37B (each electric accessory 37a1, 37a2) and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are shown as solid lines, and the right operating port 37B (each electric accessory 37a1, 37a2) is closed. The state and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are shown as a two-dot chain line.

First, the MPU 102 starts variable display of a plurality of symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, thereby performing high speed. Move to a variable period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, when the winning / failing lottery results in a "big hit" and the lottery is distributed to the "most advantageous result", the MPU 102 is based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number (“7, 7, 7” in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L to notify the result of the winning / failing lottery (FIG. 44 (A)). )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number-specified mode in which the round game is performed with a maximum number of 15 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in a long-time mode.
After the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 in order to suggest a right-handed hit to the player.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player strikes to the right with the maximum amount of rotation of the launch handle 27, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is set to the side portion where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed. By shifting from the side of the center to the side of the opposite side, the probability of winning the right operating port 37B can be increased rather than that of the central operating port 36.
Then, when a prize is detected in the right operating port 37B, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of game balls so much. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player can advance the game advantageously by firing the game ball toward the right-handed route.

The game ball launched toward the right-handed route wins a prize in the through gate 41 provided on the right side of the center of the game board 31, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the prize in the through gate 41 is electric. If the result corresponds to the transition to the open combination state and the upper electric accessory lottery in step S1303 is not won, as described above, the lower electric accessory 37a2 provided in the right operating port 37B Is in an open state in a predetermined manner.
When the lower electric accessory 37a2 is set to the open state, the game ball utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the lower electric accessory 37a2, and travels along this plate surface to the right operating port 37B. The ball will enter (see FIG. 44 (A)). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the lower electric accessory 37a2 is formed in a flat shape, the game ball immediately enters the right operating port 37B without taking time. In FIG. 44 (A), there are two game balls (B1, B2) traveling along the plate surface of the lower electric accessory 37a2.

In the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process of the right operating port in step S206B based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37B. In the closing execution process of the right operating port, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 to set the lower electric accessory 37a2 in the closed state, as shown in FIG. .. In other words, in the high probability mode, the MPU 62 wins the electric accessory open lottery, sets the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the open state when the upper electric accessory lottery in step S1303 is not won, and then sets the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the open state. , The lower electric accessory 37a2 is set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37B.
Therefore, the remaining one game ball B2 that has traveled along the plate surface of the lower electric accessory 37a2 passes through the lower electric accessory 37a2 and falls.

Further, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37B, the MPU 102 displays a plurality of symbols displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By starting the variation display of columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4), the period shifts to the high-speed variation period (see FIG. 44 (B)). In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, in the case of a "special loss result" in the winning / failing lottery, the MPU 102 has a stop result based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the lapse of the high-speed fluctuation period, as shown in FIG. 44 (C). As a result, the result of the winning / failing lottery is notified by stopping and displaying a special combination of symbols (“3.4.1” in this embodiment) on the effective line L. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.
Further, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the small hit effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, and plays a game for the player with the line "Yatte!" Of this character. Notify that the result is a "special off result".

In the "special deviation result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the opening / closing number specified mode instead of the round number specified mode, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In this open / close number regulation mode, the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed a predetermined total number of times (twice in this embodiment), or a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls. Ends on the condition that the player has won the big prize opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when the winning / failing lottery mode is determined to be the high probability mode in step S806, the MPU 62 is specially stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 in step S807. Read the display duration. Then, when the special display duration is read, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in the present embodiment) in the display duration counters provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. Therefore, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37B, the period shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period, and as a result of the stoppage, a special combination of symbols (“3.4.1” in this embodiment). Is stopped and displayed on the valid line L, and the time until the result of the winning / failing lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 hits the timer counter T provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S907. Set "50" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting a small hit is 0.1 sec.

In other words, after the lower electric accessory 37a2 is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37B, the special display duration and the waiting time for starting the small hit When the total time of about 0.2 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the large winning opening 38a to the open state.

Further, the vertical distance between the lower electric accessory 37a2 and the large winning opening 38a is such that the lower electric accessory 37a2 is set to the closed state, and the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the lower electric accessory 37a2 freely falls. In some cases, it is set to reach the large winning opening 38a after about 0.2 sec. In other words, the remaining one game ball B2 that has traveled along the plate surface of the lower electric accessory 37a2 passes through the lower electric accessory 37a2, falls, and can win a prize in the large winning opening 38a. (See FIG. 44 (C)). According to this, since the electric accessory 37a and the large winning opening 38a are separated by a predetermined distance, the player can see that after the game ball traveling on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a starts free fall. You can play while enjoying the process of reaching the grand prize opening 38a and whether or not to win the grand prize opening 38a.

Here, as described above, the opening / closing number regulation mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number of game balls (one in the present embodiment) wins the large winning opening 38a. Since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the lower electric accessory 37a2 is formed in a flat shape, the game ball immediately enters the right operating port 37B without taking time, and the lower side The electric accessory 37a2 is difficult to hold a plurality of game balls until it is set to the closed state based on the entry of the game balls B1 into the right operating port 37B. In other words, the lower electric accessory 37a2 is less likely to be over-winned than the upper electric accessory 37a1.
In the present embodiment, the lower electric accessory 37a2 holds one or two game balls until the lower electric accessory 37a2 is set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37B. It is designed to be able to.

After that, the MPU 62 sets the large winning opening 38a in the closed state as shown in FIG. 44 (D). As a result, the other game ball B launched toward the right-handed route passes through the lower electric accessory 37a2, falls, and then utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening / closing door 38b. Since it will fall down the board surface toward the out opening 39 (see FIG. 2), it will not be possible to win a prize in the large winning opening 38a.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is located vertically below the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2. Then, the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 sets the upper electric accessory 37a1 to the open state, and then sets the upper electric accessory 37a1 to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37B. As a result, the remaining game ball B2 held by the upper electric accessory 37a1 is released, and the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 sets the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the open state, and then the right operating port. By setting the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the 37B, the remaining game ball B2 held by the lower electric accessory 37a2 is released. Further, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b in an open state so that the game ball B2 released from the upper electric accessory 37a1 can enter the large winning opening 38a, and is released from the lower electric accessory 37a2. The opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state so that the game ball B2 that has been played can enter the large winning opening 38a.

In other words, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state at the timing when the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 sets the upper electric accessory 37a1 to the closed state. Further, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state at the timing when the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 sets the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the closed state. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can insert the remaining game ball B2 held by the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 into the large winning opening 38a, and the game ball B2. A predetermined game ball can be paid out at the time of entering the ball. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lower electric accessory 37a2 has a plate surface on the vertically upper side formed in a plane shape, and is a first guide piece capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area. The upper electric accessory 37a1 has a wavy plate surface on the vertically upper side thereof, and can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and is more than the lower electric accessory 37a2. It functions as a second guide piece that can hold the game ball.
In the present embodiment, the upper electric accessory 37a1 can hold more game balls than the lower electric accessory 37a2 by forming the plate surface on the vertically upper side in a wavy shape. By forming the plate surface on the vertically upper side into a flat surface and performing surface processing so as to make the game ball less slippery, it may be possible to hold more game balls than the lower electric accessory 37a2. In short, the second guide piece may be able to hold more game balls than the first guide piece.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 enter the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37B after setting the lower electric accessory drive unit 37a2 in the open state. By setting the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the closed state based on the ball, the first open / closed state in which the remaining game ball B2 held by the lower electric accessory 37a2 is released, and the upper electric accessory 37a2. After setting 37a1 to the open state, by setting the upper electric accessory 37a1 to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37B, the remaining held by the upper electric accessory 37a1. It has a second open / closed state in which the game ball B2 is released.

According to this, the pachinko machine 10 has a first open / closed state for opening and closing the lower electric accessory 37a2 capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area. Since the upper electric accessory 37a1 that can be held and can hold more game balls than the lower electric accessory 37a2 is set to one of the second open / closed states, the second open / close state is set. By setting, a large number of gaming balls can be inserted into the large winning opening 38a as compared with the case where the first open / closed state is set. Therefore, since the player pays attention to whether or not the upper electric accessory 37a1 opens and closes, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 sets the upper electric accessory 37a1 to the open state or the closed state, and the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 sets the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the open state. Alternatively, although the closed state is set, the opening and closing of the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 may be set by one drive unit.

Further, in the present embodiment, the process of step S1301 functions as a guide piece lottery means for executing a lottery as to whether or not to set the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 in the open state. Then, the electric service support process in step S306B is set to either the first open / closed state or the second open / closed state based on the lottery result of the guide piece lottery means, thereby setting the upper electric accessory. It functions as a holding amount adjusting means for adjusting the holding amount of the game ball in the 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2.

According to this, since the pachinko machine 10 includes the electric service support process of step S306B for adjusting the amount of holding the game ball, the amount of the game ball to be held in the electric service support process of step S306B is increased. By adjusting so as to increase the number, it is possible to facilitate the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 38a. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
Further, according to this, in the electric service support process in step S306B, the amount of the game ball held by the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 is adjusted based on the lottery result of the process in step S1301. Therefore, the player pays attention to the lottery result of the process of step S1301. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In the present embodiment, the holding amount adjusting means is set to either the first open / closed state or the second open / closed state based on the lottery result of the guide piece lottery means, so that the upper electric accessory is provided. The amount of holding the game ball was adjusted by the 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2. On the other hand, the holding amount adjusting means, for example, by alternately setting the first open / closed state and the second open / closed state without based on the lottery result of the guide piece lottery means, the upper electric accessory 37a1 and The amount of holding the game ball by the lower electric accessory 37a2 may be adjusted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the holding amount adjusting means is set to either the first open / closed state or the second open / closed state, so that the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 play a game. The amount of holding the ball was adjusted. On the other hand, the holding amount adjusting means may adjust the amount of holding the game ball by, for example, by configuring the guide piece so that the amount of holding the game ball can be varied. Good. In short, the holding amount adjusting means only needs to be able to adjust the holding amount of the game ball with the guide piece.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the opening / closing door 38b is located on the vertically lower side of the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2, the opening / closing door 38b is located on the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2. By setting both the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the closed state, the game ball B2 released from the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 can freely fall and open / close the door. It will be heading for 38b. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can easily allow the remaining game ball B2 held by the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 to enter the large winning opening 38a.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a "special loss result" is obtained without being a "big hit" in the winning / losing lottery, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state and then wins a big prize. The opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of the game balls into the mouth 38a. Then, the upper electric accessory 37a1 is a plurality of games that flow down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the upper electric accessory 37a1 (two in the present embodiment) is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. It is possible to hold the sphere. Since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the upper electric accessory 37a1 is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball will enter the right operating port 37B over time while being shaken by this plate surface. Is.
According to this, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b in the open state, and then sets the opening / closing door 38b in the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the large winning opening 38a. Since the upper electric accessory 37a1 can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls B2 released from the upper electric accessory 37a1 is larger than a predetermined number of game balls, pachinko The machine 10 can allow more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls to enter the large winning opening 38a, and can facilitate over-winning. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In the present embodiment, the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 set the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 in the open state, and then move to the right operating port 37B. The upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 was set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1, but the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the upper electric accessory 37a1 was set based on the entry of two or more game balls. The lower electric accessory 37a2 may be set to the closed state. In short, the guide piece driving unit may set the guide piece in the open state and then set the guide piece in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. When the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 is set to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state and then 0. It is sufficient that the variable display is terminated and the stop display is displayed when 1 sec has elapsed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 set the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 in the open state, and then move to the right operating port 37B. The upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 was set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1, but other conditions such as the elapse of a predetermined time were satisfied. The upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 may be set to the closed state based on the above. In this case, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 in the closed state by the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2. The opening / closing door 38b may be set to the open state according to the timing according to the conditions.

Further, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is located vertically below the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2, but the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2. As long as it is located on the downstream side of the flow path of the game ball that has passed through the object 37a2, it does not have to be located on the vertically lower side of the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a "special loss result" is obtained without being a "big hit" in the winning / losing lottery, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state and then wins a big prize. The opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls (one in the present embodiment) into the mouth 38a, and the upper electric accessory 37a1 is released from the upper electric accessory 37a1. It has become possible to hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of balls (two in the present embodiment) is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. On the other hand, the upper electric accessory 37a1 can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the upper electric accessory 37a1 is larger than a predetermined number of game balls. It does not have to be. In other words, the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the upper electric accessory 37a1 does not have to be formed in a wavy shape.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper electric accessory 37a1, the lower electric accessory 37a2, the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1, and the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area. It is possible and also functions as a ball entry assisting means for assisting the entry of a game ball into the variable winning device 38. In this case, the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 function as an auxiliary main body portion located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball entering the variable winning device 38, and drive the upper electric accessory. The portion 37b1 and the lower electric accessory driving unit 37b2 are in a holding state by driving the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 (open state of the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2). Alternatively, it functions as an auxiliary drive unit set to a non-holding state (closed state of the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2).
Then, the electric accessory driving unit 37b holds a plurality of game balls B1 and B2 flowing down the game area by setting the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 in the holding state, and holds the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2. By setting both the object 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the non-holding state, the object 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 are held by the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 so as not to interfere with the game ball flowing down the game area. The game ball B2 has been released.

In the present embodiment, the ball entry assisting means employs the upper electric accessory 37a1, the lower electric accessory 37a2, the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1, and the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2. Other mechanical elements may be adopted. In other words, the ball entry assisting means may be configured independently of the starting ball entry means (central actuating port 36 and right actuating port 37). In short, the auxiliary main body may be capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary main body is larger than a predetermined number of game balls.

According to such an embodiment, in addition to being able to exert substantially the same effects as those of the first embodiment, the following actions / effects can be obtained.
(9) The pachinko machine 10 can hold a first open / closed state for opening / closing the lower electric accessory 37a2 that can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area. Since the upper electric accessory 37a1 that can hold more game balls than the lower electric accessory 37a2 is set to one of the second open / closed states, it is set to the second open / closed state. As a result, a large number of gaming balls can be inserted into the large winning opening 38a as compared with the case where the first open / closed state is set. Therefore, since the player pays attention to whether or not the upper electric accessory 37a1 opens and closes, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(10) The upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 set the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 in the open state, and then set the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2. By setting the accessory 37a2 to the closed state, the game ball held by the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 is released, and the pachinko machine 10 adjusts the amount of holding the game ball. Since the processing for electric service support in step S306B is provided, the game ball is inserted into the large winning opening 38a by adjusting so as to increase the amount of holding the game ball in the processing for electric service support in step S306B. It can be made easier. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(11) In the electric service support process in step S306B, the amount of the game ball held by the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 is adjusted based on the lottery result of the process in step S1301. The person pays attention to the lottery result of the process of step S1301. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 45 is a front view of the game board in which the vicinity of the right operating port and the variable winning device according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention is enlarged.
In the first embodiment, the right operating port 37 has an electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) formed of a substantially flat plate-shaped movable piece having a wavy plate surface on the vertically upper side. Was there.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, the right operating port 37C has an electric accessory 37a3 as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a substantially flat plate-shaped movable piece. It differs from the first embodiment in that it is different from the first embodiment.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game board 31 is arranged on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a3 at a distance of about one game ball, and the plate surface on the vertically upper side is formed in a wavy shape. It differs from the first embodiment in that it includes a plate 50 composed of a flat plate-shaped movable piece.
The player hits the right with the maximum amount of rotation of the launch handle 27, and sets the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side of the side portion, the game ball can be guided to the right operating port 37C while avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like.

The electric accessory 37a3 is provided so as to be inclined so as to descend toward the right operating port 37C, and is connected to the electric accessory drive unit 37b mounted on the back side of the game board 31. The electric accessory 37a3 is set to either a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) or an open state (supported state or guided state) by being driven by the electric accessory driving unit 37b. The closed state is a state in which the right operating port 37C is closed so that the game ball is not allowed to enter the right operating port 37C by retracting the electric accessory 37a3 toward the inside of the game board 31. In the open state, the electric accessory 37a3 is advanced toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31, so that the game ball is inserted into the right operating port 37C and the right operating port 37C is opened. is there.

Here, when the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state, the game ball passes through the electric accessory 37a3 and falls.
Further, when the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a3 and enters the right operating port 37C along the plate surface. Will be done. At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a3 is formed in a flat shape, the game ball immediately enters the right operating port 37C without taking time.
Therefore, the game ball cannot win the right operating opening 37C when the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state, and the game ball cannot win the right operating opening 37C when the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the open state. Can win a prize.

The plate 50 is provided so that the plate surface on the vertically lower side is parallel to the horizontal plane, and is connected to the plate drive unit 50a mounted on the back surface side of the game board 31. By being driven by the plate driving unit 50a, the plate 50 vibrates in a simple manner so as to repeat a forward state and a backward state. The forward state is a state in which the plate 50 is advanced toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31 to hold the game ball flowing down the game area. Here, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the plate 50 is formed in a wavy shape, the plate 50 can be held without dropping the game ball. The retracted state is a state in which the plate 50 is retracted toward the inside of the game board 31 so as not to interfere with the game ball flowing down the game area. In this embodiment, the period of simple vibration of the plate 50 is set to 2 sec. Further, in the present embodiment, the plate 50 is designed so as to be able to hold 3 to 4 game balls while in the advanced state.

<Electrical configuration of voice emission control device 90 and display control device 100>
FIG. 46 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the voice emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 46, the voice emission control device 90 includes a voice emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the voice light emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 constituting the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the ROM 93 and the RAM 94.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the ROM 93, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. Is. The RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a.

The MPU 92 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main control device 60 as described above. Further, the input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the push button 25b. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, a speaker unit 24, and a display control device 100. Further, the output port of the MPU 92 is connected to a plate drive unit 50a that opens and closes the plate 50.
The MPU 92 executes drive control of the various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c and the speaker unit 24 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60.
Further, the MPU 92 transmits a command as a result of analyzing these commands to the display control device 100. The voice emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) provided with connectors at both ends of the signal line.

<About the flow after shifting to the high probability mode>
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a right operating port, a variable winning device, and a symbol display device when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening when the winning / failing result becomes a “special loss result” after shifting to the high probability mode. Is.
In addition, the high probability mode shifts to the case where the winning / losing lottery becomes a "big hit winning" and the distribution lottery is divided into the "explicit small round high probability result" or the "most advantageous result". In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Further, in FIG. 47, the open state of the right operating port 37C and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are shown as solid lines, and the closed state of the right operating port 37C and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are shown as a two-dot chain line.

First, the MPU 102 starts variable display of a plurality of symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, thereby performing high speed. Move to a variable period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, when the winning / failing lottery results in a "big hit" and the lottery is distributed to the "most advantageous result", the MPU 102 is based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number (“7, 7, 7” in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L to notify the result of the winning / failing lottery (FIG. 47 (A)). )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number-specified mode in which the round game is performed with a maximum number of 15 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in a long-time mode.
After the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 47 (A), the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 in order to suggest a right-handed hit to the player.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player strikes to the right with the maximum amount of rotation of the launch handle 27, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is set to the side portion where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed. By shifting from the side of the center to the side of the opposite side, the probability of winning the right operating port 37C can be increased rather than that of the central operating port 36.
Then, when a prize is detected in the right operating port 37C, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of game balls so much. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player can advance the game advantageously by firing the game ball toward the right-handed route.

The game ball launched toward the right-handed route will be held by the plate 50 in the forward state after flowing down the game area. FIG. 47 (A) illustrates a state in which three game balls are held by the plate 50.
As described above, the plate 50 vibrates in a simple manner, so that the plate 50 is in the forward state and then in the backward state. When the plate 50 is in the retracted state, it does not interfere with the game ball flowing down the game area, so that the game ball held by the plate 50 falls as shown in FIG. 47 (B). Will continue to do.

Further, the game ball launched toward the right-handed route wins a prize in the through gate 41 provided on the right side of the central portion of the game board 31 before being held by the plate 50, and wins the through gate 41. When the result of the internal lottery performed based on the above is the result corresponding to the transition to the electric service open state, as described above, the electric accessory 37a3 provided in the right operating port 37C is a predetermined one. It becomes an open state in the mode.
When the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a3 and enters the right operating port 37C along this plate surface. (See FIG. 47 (B)). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a3 is formed in a flat shape, the game ball immediately enters the right operating port 37C without taking time. In addition, in FIG. 47 (B), the number of game balls transmitted through the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a3 is three (B1, B2). These three game balls are game balls that have fallen from the plate 50.

In the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process of the right operating port in step S206 based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37C. In the closing execution process of the right operating port, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a3 in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 47 (C). In other words, in the high probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a3 to the open state when the electric accessory opening lottery is won, and then based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37C. The electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state.
Therefore, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a3 pass through the electric accessory 37a3 and fall.

Further, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37C, the MPU 102 displays a plurality of symbols displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By starting the variation display of columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4), the period shifts to the high-speed variation period (see FIG. 47 (C)). In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, in the case of a "special loss result" in the winning / failing lottery, the MPU 102 has a stop result based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the lapse of the high-speed fluctuation period, as shown in FIG. 47 (D). As a result, the result of the winning / failing lottery is notified by stopping and displaying a special combination of symbols (“3.4.1” in this embodiment) on the effective line L. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.
Further, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the small hit effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, and plays a game for the player with the line "Yatte!" Of this character. Notify that the result is a "special off result".

In the "special deviation result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the opening / closing number specified mode instead of the round number specified mode, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In this open / close number regulation mode, the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed a predetermined total number of times (twice in this embodiment), or a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls. Ends on the condition that the player has won the big prize opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when the winning / failing lottery mode is determined to be the high probability mode in step S806, the MPU 62 is specially stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 in step S807. Read the display duration. Then, when the special display duration is read, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in the present embodiment) in the display duration counters provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. Therefore, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37C, the period shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period, and as a result of the stoppage, a special combination of symbols (“3.4.1” in this embodiment). Is stopped and displayed on the valid line L, and the time until the result of the winning / failing lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 hits the timer counter T provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S907. Set "50" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting a small hit is 0.1 sec.

In other words, after the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37C, the total time of the special display duration and the waiting time for starting the small hit. When about 0.2 sec is elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the large winning opening 38a in the open state.

Further, the vertical distance between the electric accessory 37a3 and the large winning opening 38a is about 0.2 sec when the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state and the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a3 falls freely. It is set to reach the big winning opening 38a later. In other words, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a3 pass through the electric accessory 37a3, fall, and can win a prize in the large winning opening 38a (Fig.). See 47 (D)). According to this, since the electric accessory 37a3 and the large winning opening 38a are separated from each other by a predetermined distance, the player can see that after the game ball traveling on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a3 starts to fall freely. You can play while enjoying the process of reaching the grand prize opening 38a and whether or not to win the grand prize opening 38a.

FIG. 48 shows the right operating port, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device when the winning / failing result becomes a “special loss result” and the game ball does not win in the large winning opening after shifting to the high probability mode. It is a figure which shows.
In addition, the high probability mode shifts to the case where the winning / losing lottery becomes a "big hit winning" and the distribution lottery is divided into the "explicit small round high probability result" or the "most advantageous result". In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Further, in FIG. 48, the open state of the right operating port 37C and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are shown as solid lines, and the closed state of the right operating port 37C and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are shown as a two-dot chain line.

First, the MPU 102 starts variable display of a plurality of symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, thereby performing high speed. Move to a variable period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, when the winning / failing lottery results in a "big hit" and the lottery is distributed to the "most advantageous result", the MPU 102 is based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number (“7, 7, 7” in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L to notify the result of the winning / failing lottery (FIG. 48 (A)). )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number-specified mode in which the round game is performed with a maximum number of 15 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in a long-time mode.
After the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 48 (A), the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 in order to suggest a right-handed hit to the player.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player strikes to the right with the maximum amount of rotation of the launch handle 27, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is set to the side portion where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed. By shifting from the side of the center to the side of the opposite side, the probability of winning the right operating port 37C can be increased rather than that of the central operating port 36.
Then, when a prize is detected in the right operating port 37C, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of game balls so much. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player can advance the game advantageously by firing the game ball toward the right-handed route.

The game ball launched toward the right-handed route will be held by the plate 50 in the forward state after flowing down the game area. FIG. 48A illustrates a state in which one game ball is held by the plate 50.
As described above, the plate 50 vibrates in a simple manner, so that the plate 50 is in the forward state and then in the backward state. When the plate 50 is in the retracted state, it does not interfere with the game ball flowing down the game area, so that the game ball held by the plate 50 falls as shown in FIG. 48 (B). Will continue to do.

Further, the game ball launched toward the right-handed route wins a prize in the through gate 41 provided on the right side of the central portion of the game board 31 before being held by the plate 50, and wins the through gate 41. When the result of the internal lottery performed based on the above is the result corresponding to the transition to the electric service open state, as described above, the electric accessory 37a3 provided in the right operating port 37C is a predetermined one. It becomes an open state in the mode.
When the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a3 and enters the right operating port 37C along this plate surface. (See FIG. 48 (B)). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a3 is formed in a flat shape, the game ball immediately enters the right operating port 37C without taking time. In addition, in FIG. 48 (B), the number of game balls propagating on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a3 is one (B1). This one game ball B1 is a game ball that has fallen from the plate 50.

In the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process of the right operating port in step S206 based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37C. In the closing execution process of the right operating port, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a3 in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 48 (C). In other words, in the high probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a3 to the open state when the electric accessory opening lottery is won, and then based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37C. The electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state.

Further, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37C, the MPU 102 displays a plurality of symbols displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By starting the variation display of columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4), the period shifts to the high-speed variation period (see FIG. 48 (C)). In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, in the case of a "special loss result" in the winning / failing lottery, the MPU 102 has a stop result based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the lapse of the high-speed fluctuation period, as shown in FIG. 48 (D). As a result, the result of the winning / failing lottery is notified by stopping and displaying a special combination of symbols (“3.4.1” in this embodiment) on the effective line L. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.
Further, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the small hit effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, and plays a game for the player with the line "Yatte!" Of this character. Notify that the result is a "special off result".

In the "special deviation result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the opening / closing number specified mode instead of the round number specified mode, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In this open / close number regulation mode, the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed a predetermined total number of times (twice in this embodiment), or a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls. Ends on the condition that the player has won the big prize opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when the winning / failing lottery mode is determined to be the high probability mode in step S806, the MPU 62 is specially stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 in step S807. Read the display duration. Then, when the special display duration is read, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in the present embodiment) in the display duration counters provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. Therefore, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37C, the period shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period, and as a result of the stoppage, a special combination of symbols (“3.4.1” in this embodiment). Is stopped and displayed on the valid line L, and the time until the result of the winning / failing lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 hits the timer counter T provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S907. Set "50" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting a small hit is 0.1 sec.

In other words, after the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37C, the total time of the special display duration and the waiting time for starting the small hit. When about 0.2 sec is elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the large winning opening 38a in the open state.

Further, the vertical distance between the electric accessory 37a3 and the large winning opening 38a is about 0.2 sec when the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state and the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a3 falls freely. It is set to reach the big winning opening 38a later. In other words, the remaining game balls that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a3 pass through the electric accessory 37a3, fall, and can win a prize in the large winning opening 38a. According to this, since the electric accessory 37a3 and the large winning opening 38a are separated from each other by a predetermined distance, the player can see that after the game ball traveling on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a3 starts to fall freely. You can play while enjoying the process of reaching the grand prize opening 38a and whether or not to win the grand prize opening 38a. However, in the example of FIG. 47, since there is no game ball that has passed through the electric accessory 37a3 and has fallen, the game ball cannot win a prize in the large winning opening 38a (see FIG. 48 (D)).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is located on the vertically lower side of the electric accessory 37a3. Then, the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a3 in the open state, and then sets the electric accessory 37a3 in the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37C. The remaining game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a3 is released. Further, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b in an open state so that the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a3 can enter the large winning opening 38a.

In other words, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state at the timing when the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a3 to the closed state. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can insert the remaining game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a3 into the large winning opening 38a, and the pachinko machine 10 can enter a predetermined game ball at the time of entering the game ball B2. Can be paid out. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the opening / closing door 38b is located on the vertically lower side of the electric accessory 37a3, the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b. The game ball B2 released from the above will freely fall and head toward the opening / closing door 38b. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can easily allow the remaining game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a3 to enter the large winning opening 38a.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a3 to the open state, and then closes the electric accessory 37a3 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37C. Although it has been set, the electric accessory 37a3 may be set to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls. In short, the guide piece driving unit may set the guide piece in the open state and then set the guide piece in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. When the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls, the MPU 62 fluctuates when 0.1 sec elapses after setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. It suffices if it is configured to end the display and stop the display.

Further, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a3 in the open state, and then closes the electric accessory 37a3 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37C. Although it has been set, for example, the electric accessory 37a3 may be set to the closed state based on satisfying other conditions such as the elapse of a predetermined time. In this case, the variable winning drive unit 38c can set the opening / closing door 38b in the open state at the timing corresponding to other conditions for setting the electric accessory 37a3 in the closed state in the electric accessory drive unit 37b. Good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is located on the vertically lower side of the electric accessory 37a3, but is located on the downstream side of the flow path of the game ball that has passed through the electric accessory 37a3. If so, it does not have to be located on the vertically lower side of the electric accessory 37a3.

Further, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory 37a3 and the electric accessory drive unit 37b can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and assist the entry of the game balls into the variable winning device 38. It also functions as an auxiliary means. In this case, the electric accessory 37a3 functions as an auxiliary main body portion located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball entering the variable winning device 38, and the electric accessory drive unit 37b uses the electric accessory 37a3. By driving, it functions as an auxiliary driving unit that sets a holding state (open state of the electric accessory 37a3) or a non-holding state (closed state of the electric accessory 37a3).
Then, the electric accessory driving unit 37b holds the plurality of game balls B1 and B2 flowing down the game area by setting the electric accessory 37a3 in the holding state, and sets the electric accessory 37a3 in the non-holding state. As a result, the game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a3 is released so as not to interfere with the game ball flowing down the game area.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory 37a3 and the electric accessory drive unit 37b are used as the ball entry assisting means, but other mechanical elements may be adopted. In other words, the ball entry assisting means may be configured independently of the starting ball entry means (central actuating port 36 and right actuating port 37). In short, the auxiliary main body may be capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary main body is larger than a predetermined number of game balls.

Further, in the present embodiment, the plate 50 and the plate driving unit 50a function as holding means capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area. Specifically, the plate 50 functions as a holding main body portion located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball held by the electric accessory 37a3, and the plate driving portion 50a drives the plate 50 by driving the plate 50. It functions as a holding drive unit that sets the holding state or non-holding state. Then, the plate driving unit 50a holds a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the plate 50 in the holding state, and sets the plate 50 in the non-holding state to flow down the game area. The game ball held by the plate 50 is released so as not to interfere with the ball.
According to this, the plate 50 and the plate driving unit 50a can surely hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area on the electric accessory 37a3.

Further, in the present embodiment, the plate driving unit 50a is set to simply vibrate by driving the plate 50 so as to repeat the holding state and the non-holding state. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can simplify the configuration of the plate 50 and the plate driving unit 50a.

In the present embodiment, the plate 50 is located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball held by the electric accessory 37a3, but the flow path of the game ball held by the electric accessory 37a3. It does not have to be located on the upstream side. In short, the variable winning device may include an opening / closing door located on the downstream side of the flow path of the game ball that has passed through the holding main body.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a "special loss result" is obtained without being a "big hit" in the winning / losing lottery, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state and then wins a big prize. The opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of the game balls into the mouth 38a. Then, the plate 50 has a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the plate 50 (the number excluding the game balls entering the right operating port 37C) is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. It is possible to hold a game ball. The plate 50 is provided so that the plate surface on the vertically lower side is parallel to the horizontal plane, and the plate surface on the vertically upper side is formed in a wavy shape. This is because it will be held without falling.
According to this, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b in the open state, and then sets the opening / closing door 38b in the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the large winning opening 38a. Since the plate 50 can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the plate 50 is larger than a predetermined number of game balls, the pachinko machine 10 has a large winning opening. It is possible to make it easier for more game balls to enter the 38a than a predetermined number of game balls, and it is possible to make it easier to make an over prize. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to such an embodiment, in addition to being able to exert substantially the same effects as those in (1) and (2) in the first embodiment, the following actions / effects can be obtained.
(12) The plate driving unit 50a holds a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the plate 50 in the holding state, and flows down the game area by setting the plate 50 in the non-holding state. The game ball held by the plate 50 is released so as not to interfere with the game ball. According to this, the plate 50 and the plate driving unit 50a can surely hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area on the electric accessory 37a3.

(13) Since the plate driving unit 50a is set to make a simple vibration by driving the plate 50 so as to repeat the holding state and the non-holding state, the pachinko machine 10 is set to the plate 50 and the plate driving unit 50a. The configuration can be simplified.
(14) The variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state, and then sets the opening / closing door 38b to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the large winning opening 38a, and sets the plate 50. Is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the plate 50 is larger than a predetermined number of game balls. It is possible to make it easier to enter more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls, and it is possible to make it easier to make over-winning. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, all the remaining game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a, fall, and can win a prize in the large winning opening 38a. ..
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is said that all the remaining game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a can pass through the electric accessory 37a, fall, and win the big winning opening 38a. It differs from the first embodiment in that it is not limited.

FIG. 49 is a front view of the game board in which the vicinity of the right operating port and the variable winning device according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention is enlarged.
The right operating port 37 includes the electric accessory 37a and the electric accessory drive unit 37b as in the first embodiment, and as shown in FIG. 49, is located vertically above the electric accessory 37a. It is provided with a guardrail 371 provided and a general winning opening 35D provided on the vertically lower side of the electric accessory 37a. In the present embodiment, the right operating port 37 and the electric accessory 37a are provided at positions offset vertically upward as compared with the first embodiment. Further, in the present embodiment, the cover 381 is formed in a shape that matches the offset of the right operating port 37 and the electric accessory 37a.

The guardrail 371 is provided on the game board 31 so that its left end abuts on the upper right end of the right operating port 37 and is inclined so as to descend toward the right operating port 37. Further, the guardrail 371 is provided on the game board 31 so as to be parallel to the electric accessory 37a. The width of the guardrail 371 in the horizontal direction is set to be about half that of the electric accessory 37a. Further, the guardrail 371 protrudes from the game board 31 toward the window panel 22 and is fixed. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down from the vertically upper side of the guardrail 371, for example, the game ball that has passed through the flow path indicated by the arrow A in the figure, utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the guardrail 371 and is operated to the right. It will flow down toward the out port 39 (see FIG. 2) without entering the ball 37. Further, the game ball flowing down from the right side of the guardrail 371, for example, the game ball passing through the flow path indicated by the arrow B in the figure, is a plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a or a vertically upper side of the opening / closing door 38b. It will flow down along the board surface of the door. Here, the distance between the electric accessory 37a and the guardrail 371 is wider than that of one game ball. Therefore, the guardrail 371 does not obstruct the flow of the game ball flowing down along the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a.

The general winning opening 35D is provided on the game board 31 so as to be located vertically below the guardrail 371. In other words, the general winning opening 35D reached directly below the guardrail 371 (the left half surface of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) among the game balls flowing down along the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a. The game ball is provided at a position where the ball can be entered by setting the electric accessory 37a in the closed state. Among the game balls that flow down along the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a, the game ball that reaches the right half surface of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state of the electric accessory 37a. As a result, the player avoids the general winning opening 35D and falls toward the opening / closing door 38b of the large winning opening 38a.

Further, in the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 executes the payout of 10 prize balls when the balls enter the general winning opening 35, and the balls enter the variable winning device 38. In that case, 15 prize balls were paid out.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 15 prize balls when the balls enter the general winning openings 35 and 35D, and enters the variable winning device 38. Is different from the first embodiment in that 10 prize balls are paid out when the above-mentioned occurs.

<About the flow after shifting to the high probability mode>
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a right operating port, a variable winning device, and a symbol display device when the winning / failing result becomes a “special deviation result” after shifting to the high probability mode.
In addition, the high probability mode shifts to the case where the winning / losing lottery becomes a "big hit winning" and the distribution lottery is divided into the "explicit small round high probability result" or the "most advantageous result". In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Further, in FIG. 50, the open state of the right operating port 37 and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are shown as solid lines, and the closed state of the right operating port 37 and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are shown as a two-dot chain line.

First, the MPU 102 starts variable display of a plurality of symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, thereby performing high speed. Move to a variable period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, when the winning / failing lottery results in a "big hit" and the lottery is distributed to the "most advantageous result", the MPU 102 is based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number (“7, 7, 7” in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L to notify the result of the winning / failing lottery (FIG. 50 (A)). )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number-specified mode in which the round game is performed with a maximum number of 15 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in a long-time mode.
After the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 50 (A), the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 in order to suggest a right-handed hit to the player.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits the right with the maximum amount of rotation of the launch handle 27, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is the side portion where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed. By shifting from the side of the center to the side of the opposite side, the probability of winning the right operating port 37 can be increased rather than that of the central operating port 36.
Then, when a prize is detected in the right operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of game balls so much. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player can advance the game advantageously by firing the game ball toward the right-handed route.

The game ball launched toward the right-handed route wins a prize in the through gate 41 provided on the right side of the center of the game board 31, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the prize in the through gate 41 is electric. When the result corresponds to the transition to the open position, the electric accessory 37a provided in the right operating port 37 is opened in a predetermined manner as described above.
When the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a and enters the right operating port 37 along this plate surface. (See FIG. 50 (A)). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball enters the right operating port 37 over time while being shaken by this plate surface. Become. In FIG. 50A, there are three game balls (B1, B21, B22) traveling on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a.

In the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process of the right operating port in step S206 based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. In the closing execution process of the right operating port, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state, as shown in FIG. In other words, in the high probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state when the electric accessory opening lottery is won, and then based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. The electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state.
Therefore, the remaining two game balls B21 and B22 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a and fall.

Further, the MPU 102 starts variable display of a plurality of symbol strings Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, thereby performing high speed. It shifts to a variable period (see FIG. 50 (B)). In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, in the case of a "special loss result" in the winning / failing lottery, the MPU 102 has a stop result based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the lapse of the high-speed fluctuation period, as shown in FIG. 50 (C). As a result, the result of the winning / failing lottery is notified by stopping and displaying a combination of special symbols (“3.4.1” in this embodiment) on the effective line L. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode.
Further, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the small hit effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, and plays a game for the player with the line "Yatte!" Of this character. Notify that the result is a "special off result".

In the "special deviation result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the opening / closing number specified mode instead of the round number specified mode, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In this open / close number regulation mode, the opening / closing of the large winning opening 38a is executed a predetermined total number of times (twice in this embodiment), or a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls. Ends on the condition that the player has won the big prize opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when the winning / failing lottery mode is determined to be the high probability mode in step S806, the MPU 62 is specially stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 in step S807. Read the display duration. Then, when the special display duration is read, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in the present embodiment) in the display duration counters provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. Therefore, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, the period shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period, and as a result of the stoppage, a special combination of symbols (“3.4.1” in this embodiment). Is stopped and displayed on the valid line L, and the time until the result of the winning / failing lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 hits the timer counter T provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S907. Set "50" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting a small hit is 0.1 sec.

In other words, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, the total time of the special display duration and the waiting time for starting the small hit When a certain 0.2 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the large winning opening 38a in the open state.

Further, the vertical distance between the electric accessory 37a and the large winning opening 38a is about 0.2 sec when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state and the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a falls freely. It is set to reach the big winning opening 38a later. In other words, the remaining two game balls B21 and B22 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a, fall, and can win a prize in the large winning opening 38a. (See FIG. 50 (C)). According to this, since the electric accessory 37a and the large winning opening 38a are separated by a predetermined distance, the player can see that after the game ball traveling on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a starts free fall. You can play while enjoying the process of reaching the grand prize opening 38a and whether or not to win the grand prize opening 38a.

Here, as described above, among the game balls B21 and B22 that flow down along the vertically upper plate surface of the electric accessory 37a, the game ball B21 that has reached the left half surface of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a is By setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state, the ball enters the general winning opening 35D. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the payout of 15 prize balls when the balls are entered into the general prize openings 35 and 35D.
On the other hand, among the game balls B21 and B22 that flow down along the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a, the game ball B22 that reaches the right half surface of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a is an electric accessory. By setting 37a in the closed state, the ball enters the large winning opening 38a while avoiding the general winning opening 35D. Then, when the pachinko machine 10 enters the variable winning device 38, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 winning balls.

After that, the MPU 62 sets the large winning opening 38a in the closed state as shown in FIG. 50 (D). As a result, the other game ball B launched toward the right-handed route passes through the electric accessory 37a, falls, and then utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening / closing door 38b, and this plate surface is used. Since it will fall toward the out opening 39 (see FIG. 2), it will not be possible to win a prize in the large winning opening 38a.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is located on the vertically lower side of the electric accessory 37a. Then, the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state, and then sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. The remaining game balls B21 and B22 held by the electric accessory 37a are released. Further, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b in an open state so that the game balls B21 and B22 released from the electric accessory 37a can enter the large winning opening 38a.

In other words, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state at the timing when the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can insert the remaining game balls B21 and B22 held by the electric accessory 37a into the large winning opening 38a, and when the game balls B21 and B22 enter. A predetermined game ball can be paid out. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the opening / closing door 38b is located on the vertically lower side of the electric accessory 37a, the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b. The game balls B21 and B22 released from the above will freely fall and head toward the opening / closing door 38b. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can easily allow the remaining game balls B21 and B22 held by the electric accessory 37a to enter the large winning opening 38a.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a "special loss result" is obtained without being a "big hit" in the winning / losing lottery, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state and then wins a big prize. The opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of the game balls into the mouth 38a. Then, the electric accessory 37a is a plurality of game balls that flow down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the electric accessory 37a (two in the present embodiment) is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. It can be held. Since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball will enter the right operating port 37 over time while being shaken by this plate surface. is there.
According to this, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b in the open state, and then sets the opening / closing door 38b in the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the large winning opening 38a. Since the electric accessory 37a can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of the game balls B21 and B22 released from the electric accessory 37a is larger than the predetermined number of game balls, the pachinko machine The machine 10 can allow more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls to enter the large winning opening 38a, and can facilitate over-winning. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state, and then closes the electric accessory 37a based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. Although it has been set, the electric accessory 37a may be set to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls. In short, the guide piece driving unit may set the guide piece in the open state and then set the guide piece in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. When the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls, the MPU 62 fluctuates when 0.1 sec elapses after setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. It suffices if it is configured to end the display and stop the display.

Further, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state, and then closes the electric accessory 37a based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operating port 37. Although it has been set, for example, the electric accessory 37a may be set to the closed state based on satisfying other conditions such as the elapse of a predetermined time. In this case, the variable winning drive unit 38c can set the opening / closing door 38b in the open state at the timing corresponding to other conditions for setting the electric accessory 37a in the closed state in the electric accessory drive unit 37b. Good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is located on the vertically lower side of the electric accessory 37a, but is located on the downstream side of the flow path of the game ball that has passed through the electric accessory 37a. If so, it does not have to be located on the vertically lower side of the electric accessory 37a.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a "special loss result" is obtained without being a "big hit" in the winning / losing lottery, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state and then wins a big prize. The opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of the game balls into the mouth 38a, and the electric accessory 37a is the game ball released from the electric accessory 37a. It has become possible to hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number (two in the present embodiment) is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. On the other hand, the electric accessory 37a can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the electric accessory 37a is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. It does not have to be. In other words, the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a does not have to be formed in a wavy shape.

Further, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory 37a and the electric accessory drive unit 37b can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and assist the entry of the game balls into the variable winning device 38. It also functions as an auxiliary means. In this case, the electric accessory 37a functions as an auxiliary main body portion located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball entering the variable winning device 38, and the electric accessory drive unit 37b uses the electric accessory 37a. By driving, it functions as an auxiliary driving unit that is set to a holding state (open state of the electric accessory 37a) or a non-holding state (closed state of the electric accessory 37a).
Then, the electric accessory driving unit 37b holds the plurality of game balls B1, B21, B22 flowing down the game area by setting the electric accessory 37a in the holding state, and puts the electric accessory 37a in the non-holding state. By setting, the game balls B21 and B22 held by the electric accessory 37a are released so as not to interfere with the game balls flowing down the game area.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory 37a and the electric accessory drive unit 37b are used as the ball entry assisting means, but other mechanical elements may be adopted. In other words, the ball entry assisting means may be configured independently of the starting ball entry means (central actuating port 36 and right actuating port 37). In short, the auxiliary main body may be capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary main body is larger than a predetermined number of game balls.

Further, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory 37a is held at an advantageous side holding position (of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path advantageous to the player when the remaining game ball is released by the electric accessory drive unit 37b. When the remaining game ball is released by the electric accessory driving unit 37b and the left half surface of the plate surface, the disadvantaged side holding position (electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position. The right half of the plate surface). Specifically, the advantageous side holding position becomes advantageous for the player by entering the ball into the general winning opening 35D, which pays out a predetermined number (15 in this embodiment) of the game ball when the game ball enters. By guiding to the route and entering the disadvantageous side holding position into the large winning opening 38a that pays out a smaller number (10 in this embodiment) of the game balls than the predetermined number of the game balls when the game balls enter. It is designed to lead to a route that is disadvantageous to the player.

According to this, the electric accessory 37a has an advantageous side holding position that leads to a path that is advantageous to the player when the remaining game ball is released by the electric accessory drive unit 37b, and the electric accessory drive unit 37b. When the remaining game ball is released at, the player has a disadvantageous side holding position that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position. Therefore, when the player releases the remaining game balls by the electric accessory drive unit 37b, the player pays attention to the position of the game balls. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 pays attention to the player's game. Can be improved.

Further, the advantageous side holding position is guided to a route that is advantageous to the player by entering the ball into the general winning opening 35D that pays out a predetermined number of game balls when the game ball is entered, and the disadvantaged side holding position is the game. When the ball enters the large winning opening 38a, which pays out a smaller number of game balls than a predetermined number of game balls, the player leads to a route that is disadvantageous to the player. When the remaining game balls are released in the part 37b, the position of the game balls will be further paid attention to.
In other words, the electric accessory 37a has an advantageous side holding position that leads to a path for entering the general winning opening 35D, which is different from the large winning opening 38a, when the remaining gaming ball is released by the electric accessory driving unit 37b. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 puts the game ball in the advantageous side holding position into the general winning opening 35D, which is different from the large winning opening 38a, among the remaining game balls held by the electric accessory 37a. It is possible to make a ball, and when the game ball enters, a larger number of game balls than a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. Therefore, when the electric accessory driving unit 37b releases the remaining game balls, the player pays more attention to the position of the game balls.

In the present embodiment, the advantageous side holding position is guided to a route that is advantageous to the player by entering the general winning opening 35D that pays out a predetermined number of game balls when the game ball enters, and the disadvantageous side. The holding position leads to a route that is disadvantageous to the player by entering the ball into the large winning opening 38a that pays out a smaller number of game balls than a predetermined number when the game ball enters. In other words, the advantageous side holding position and the disadvantage side holding position have created an advantageous route and a disadvantageous route for the player by making the number of game balls to be paid out different.

On the other hand, for example, the advantageous side holding position may be guided to a route that is advantageous to the player by entering the ball into the V winning opening that triggers the transition to the open / close execution mode when the game ball enters. .. In short, the advantageous side holding position may be a position that can lead the remaining game ball to a path that is advantageous to the player when the guide piece driving unit releases the remaining game ball, and the disadvantageous side holding position is the guide piece. When the drive unit releases the remaining game balls, the position may be any position that can lead to a route that is disadvantageous to the player.

According to such an embodiment, in addition to being able to exert substantially the same effects as those of the first embodiment, the following actions / effects can be obtained.
(15) The electric accessory 37a has an advantageous side holding position that leads to a path that is advantageous to the player when the remaining game ball is released by the electric accessory drive unit 37b, and the electric accessory drive unit 37b. When releasing the remaining game ball, it has a disadvantageous side holding position that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position. Therefore, when the player releases the remaining game balls by the electric accessory drive unit 37b, the player pays attention to the position of the game balls. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 pays attention to the player's game. Can be improved.
(16) The advantageous side holding position is guided to a route that is advantageous to the player by entering the ball into the general winning opening 35D that pays out a predetermined number of game balls when the game ball is entered, and the disadvantaged side holding position is set. When entering a game ball, the player is guided to a route that is disadvantageous to the player by entering the ball into the large winning opening 38a, which pays out a smaller number of game balls than a predetermined number of game balls. When the drive unit 37b releases the remaining game balls, the position of the game balls will be further paid attention to.

(17) The electric accessory 37a has an advantageous side holding position that leads to a path for entering the general winning opening 35D, which is different from the large winning opening 38a, when the remaining gaming ball is released by the electric accessory driving unit 37b. Since the pachinko machine 10 has the remaining game balls held by the electric accessory 37a, the pachinko machine 10 enters the game ball in the advantageous side holding position into the general winning opening 35D different from the large winning opening 38a. It is possible to pay out more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls when the game balls enter. Therefore, when the electric accessory driving unit 37b releases the remaining game balls, the player pays more attention to the position of the game balls.

[Variation example of each embodiment]
The present invention is not limited to each of the above-described embodiments, and modifications, improvements, and the like within the range in which the object of the present invention can be achieved are included in the present invention.
(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes the large winning opening 38a once for each round game. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may open and close the large winning opening 38a a plurality of times per one round game.
(2) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the pachinko machine 10, after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state, a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses, or a game to the large winning opening 38a. When the total number of winning balls reaches a predetermined upper limit, the opening / closing door 38b is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit number may be changed according to the upper limit duration, and the condition for setting the opening / closing door 38b to the closed state again is arbitrary.

(3) In each of the above-described embodiments, after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state, the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a reaches eight, which is a predetermined upper limit. As a result, the opening / closing door 38b was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, in the pachinko machine 10, the upper limit number may be set to any number other than eight. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may be set with a different upper limit number depending on the distribution result. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may be set with a different upper limit number for each round in one opening / closing execution mode.

(4) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes when the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state. The door 38b was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an end trigger for setting the opening / closing door 38b to the closed state when the game ball enters, and this end occurs when a predetermined time elapses. It may be configured to allow entry into the trigger.
(5) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening / closing door 38b in the open state, and then the opening / closing door 38b is closed again after a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses. Was set to. On the other hand, for example, in the pachinko machine 10, after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state, a predetermined time elapses from the time when a prize is generated in the large winning opening 38a, so that the opening / closing door 38b is opened. It may be set to the closed state again.

(6) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening / closing door 38b to the open state and then sets the opening / closing door 38b to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may shift to the next round game without setting the opening / closing door 38b to the closed state again after setting the opening / closing door 38b to the open state.
(7) In each of the above-described embodiments, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is set shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is a time equal to or longer than the firing cycle of the game ball and is n times or less (any of n = 1, 2, 3) of the firing cycle of the game ball. It may be set to time.

(8) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of opening / closing execution modes. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has an open / close execution mode in which the round game is executed twice in the upper limit duration of the short-time mode and an open / close execution mode in which the round game is executed 15 times in the upper limit duration of the long-term mode. Had had. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may have an opening / closing execution mode different from these in terms of the mode of the upper limit duration and the number of times the round game is executed. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is different in the mode of the upper limit duration, and instead of the configuration in which a plurality of types of opening / closing execution modes are set, the degree of opening of the opening / closing door 38b is different such as half-open or full-open. , A configuration in which a plurality of types of open / close execution modes are set may be used. Further, the mode of the upper limit duration may be set so that the exact upper limit duration is different although it looks the same to the player.

(9) In each of the above-described embodiments, the game result and the effect for the open / close execution mode are set in advance so as to have a one-to-one correspondence. On the other hand, for example, the effect for the open / close execution mode may be randomly selected and set from a plurality of types of effects without corresponding to the game result, and may be selected from a plurality of types of effects by lottery or the like. And the selection rate may be different depending on the game result.

(10) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 92 finally stops and displays on the effective line L when the game result is either a "special deviation result" or a "explicit small round high probability result". As a result, the information relating to the special symbol combination was determined, and this special symbol combination was the same regardless of the type of game result. On the other hand, the MPU 92 may randomly determine the information related to the stop result so that it is difficult for the player to grasp which game result is.

(11) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the lottery for generating jackpots, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the lottery for the jackpot type when the jackpot occurs. On the other hand, the MPU 62 may use the jackpot random number counter C1 for the lottery of the jackpot type when the jackpot occurs. In this case, the jackpot type counter C2 may not be provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

(12) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of deviation results, a "special deviation result" and a "normal deviation result", and the MPU 62 stores the value of a random number that wins the jackpot occurrence. By comparing the winning / failing table with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b, the lottery for generating jackpots was executed. In other words, the MPU 62 executed the lottery related to the "special deviation result" by using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. On the other hand, the MPU 62 uses a new counter different from the jackpot random number counter C1 provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in order to execute the lottery related to the "special deviation result", thereby causing the "special deviation". A lottery related to "result" may be executed.

(13) In each of the above-described embodiments, the value of the random number that becomes the "special loss result" is two under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of the jackpot, and the jackpot occurs. Under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that becomes the "special deviation result" was 551. In other words, the probability of a "special out-of-order result" was set to be higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode. On the other hand, the probability of "special deviation result" may be set to be lower in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, and is set to be the same in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. It may have been done. Further, the probability of becoming a "special deviation result" may be set to be 0 in at least one of the low probability mode and the high probability mode.

(14) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 creates a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by setting the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode. By setting the state, a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player may be created. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by changing the number of game times in which the high-frequency support mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by changing the number of game times in which the high-probability mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. ..

(15) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 stores the hold information related to the central operating port 36 in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit, and stores the holding information related to the right operating port 37 in the second result display unit. By storing in the holding area Rb, the holding information related to the central operating port 36 and the holding information related to the right operating port 37 were stored separately. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may store the hold information related to the central operating port 36 and the holding information related to the right operating port 37 together.
(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 62 preferentially sets the hold information related to the right operating port 37 for digestion of the game times regardless of whether or not there is holding information related to the central operating port 36. .. On the other hand, the MPU 62 may set the hold information related to the central operation port 36 and the hold information related to the right operation port 37 for the digestion of the game times in the order of winning the respective hold information.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the voice emission control device 90, and the voice emission control device 90 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the display control device 100. Control of the display control device 100 was being executed. On the other hand, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the voice emission control device 90 to control the voice emission control. Control of device 90 may be performed. The command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the voice emission control device 90 and the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 are not limited to the commands described in the above embodiments and are arbitrary. ..
(18) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a voice emission control device 90, and a display control device 100 as separate control devices. On the other hand, for example, the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may be provided as the same control device, and at least one of the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 is mainly used. It may be provided as the same control device as the control device 60.

(19) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37. By starting the variable display of the symbol, the effect for playing the game was executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the effect for the game round is not limited to the effect described in each of the above-described embodiments, and is arbitrary. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the effect of playing a game by operating the movable decorative member provided on the game board 31 in combination with the symbol display device 47. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the effect for game rotation by operating the light emitting means provided on the game board 31 in combination with the symbol display device 47. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the effect for playing games by operating these decorative members and light emitting means in combination with the symbol display device 47.

(20) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes an internal lottery (win / fail lottery and distribution lottery) based on winning a prize in the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37, and then the main display unit 45. And the symbol display device 47 executes the variation display and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37 as the stop result of the variation display. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 start the variable display before executing the internal lottery, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed after the variable display is started. The result of may be displayed. In this case, after the variable display is started and before the variable display is stopped, the internal lottery may be executed and the stop result and the like may be set.

(21) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main display unit 45, and the main display unit 45 executes a variable display of a pattern and displays the result of an internal lottery as a stop result of the variable display. Was. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 may display the same stop result regardless of the result of the internal lottery as the stop result of the variable display, and by displaying the stop result at random, the inside The result of the lottery may not be identifiable. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 does not have to include the main display unit 45.

(22) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37. By starting the variable display of the symbol, the effect for playing the game was executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the symbol display device 47 may execute the effect for the game round on the display screen G by displaying the symbol (design) that clearly indicates the result of the internal lottery.

For example, the symbol display device 47 sets a predetermined region in at least one of a region narrower than the region for displaying the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the peripheral region of the region for displaying the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. When the variable display of the symbols in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is stopped, a symbol that clearly shows the result of the internal lottery may be displayed in this predetermined area. The symbols to be displayed in the predetermined area may be displayed in a variable manner or may be hidden during the variable display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Here, as the pattern to be displayed in the predetermined area, characters, colors, and patterns that are difficult for the player to identify may be adopted, or a combination thereof may be adopted. Further, it may be difficult for the player to identify by adopting characters, colors, or patterns that are not easily identified by the player but are similar to each other or a combination thereof. According to this, for example, the manager of the pachinko / pachislot machine may win the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit by visually observing the symbol display device 47 without visually observing the main display unit 45 at the end of the game round. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act is performed to cause the pachinko machine 10 to perform the above behavior.

(23) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to operate independently, but may be configured to transmit and receive information by interlocking with an external device such as a mobile phone. .. For example, the game machine is configured so that the player can output the optical code by operating a button or the like provided on the game machine, and the information of the optical code is transmitted to the camera provided on the mobile phone or the like. The game machine may be configured so that the information of the game machine can be transmitted to the web server by capturing the image, reading the image, and accessing the website. In addition, the game machine is configured so that the information of the web server can be received by the player entering the password issued by accessing the website into the game machine by operating the buttons provided on the game machine. You may.

(24) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has been illustrated and described as the gaming machine of the present invention. On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention may be another type of pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 10. For example, in the gaming machine of the present invention, when a gaming ball enters a specific area, It may be a pachinko machine that opens an electric accessory a predetermined number of times, or a pachinko machine that generates a jackpot right when a game ball enters a specific area. Further, the gaming machine of the present invention may be an arrangement ball machine or another type of gaming machine such as a sparrow ball.

[Invention group extracted from each embodiment]
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments will be described. Among the features of the present invention group, the configurations corresponding to each of the above-described embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the features of the present invention group are not limited to the above-mentioned respective embodiments, and the features of the present invention group are characterized. Deformations, improvements, etc. within the range in which the object can be achieved, and combinations of each feature are included in the features of the present invention group.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are inserted, and an internal lottery is held when the game ball is entered. Based on the lottery means to be executed (right operating port 37) and the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lottery means, the specific control state (open / close execution mode) advantageous to the player is set. A game including a game state transition means (main control device 60) for shifting the game state and a variable winning device (variable winning device 38) for shifting the game ball to a state in which the game ball can be entered when the specific control state is entered. It ’s a machine (pachinko machine 10),
The lottery means
A guide piece (electric) having an open state in which a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area can be held and entering the lottery means, and a closed state in which the game balls flowing down the game area are not allowed to enter the lottery means. The accessory 37a, 37a3, the upper electric accessory 37a1, and the lower electric accessory 37a2),
A guide piece drive unit (electric accessory drive unit 37b, upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1, and lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2) that is set to an open state or a closed state by driving the guide piece is provided. ,
The variable winning device is
A large winning opening (large winning opening 38a) that pays out a predetermined game ball when entering a game ball, and
A flow path of a game ball that has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter the large winning opening and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter. Opening and closing door (opening and closing door 38b) located on the downstream side of
A variable winning drive unit (variable winning drive unit 38c) that is set to an open state or a closed state by driving the opening / closing door is provided.
The guide piece driving unit sets the guide piece in the open state and then sets the guide piece in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. Release the remaining game balls held at
The variable winning drive unit
A game machine characterized in that the opening / closing door is set to an open state so that a game ball released from the guide piece can enter the large winning opening.

According to the feature A1 of the present invention group, the guide piece driving unit sets the guide piece in the open state and then sets the guide piece in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. By doing so, the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces are released, and the variable winning drive unit sets the opening / closing door to the open state so that the game balls released from the guide pieces can enter the large winning opening. To do. In other words, the variable winning drive unit sets the open / close door to the open state at the timing when the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit. According to this, the game machine can put the remaining game ball held by the guide piece into the large winning opening, and can pay out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters. .. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A1 of the present invention group,
The opening / closing door is a gaming machine characterized in that it is located on the vertically lower side of the guide piece.

According to the feature A2 of the present invention group, since the opening / closing door is located on the vertically lower side of the guide piece, the game ball released from the guide piece by setting the guide piece in the closed state by the guide piece driving unit. Will fall freely and head towards the open / close door. Therefore, the game machine can easily allow the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces to enter the large winning opening.

Feature A3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A1 or the feature A2 of the present invention group
The variable winning drive unit
After setting the opening / closing door to the open state, the opening / closing door is set to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the large winning opening.
The guide piece is characterized in that it can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. Machine.

According to the feature A3 of the present invention group, the variable winning drive unit sets the opening / closing door to the open state, and then sets the opening / closing door to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the large winning opening. , The guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than a predetermined number of game balls. It is possible to enter more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls into the door, and it is possible to easily over-win. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A4.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A3 of the present invention group.
The variable winning drive unit
A first opening time for setting the opening / closing door in an open state so that a game ball released from the guide piece can enter the large winning opening.
It is provided with a second opening time for setting the opening / closing door in an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece does not enter the large winning opening.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the opening / closing door is set to an open state at any of the first opening time and the second opening time.

According to the feature A4 of the present invention group, the game machine has a first opening time for setting the opening / closing door in an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece can enter the big winning opening, and the big winning opening. The opening / closing door is set to the open state so as not to enter the ball. Since the opening / closing door is set to the open state at any time of the second opening time, the player can win a big prize for the game ball released from the guide piece. You will pay attention to whether or not the ball enters the mouth. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A4 of the present invention group.
The guide piece
A first guide piece (lower electric accessory 37a2) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and
A second guide piece (upper electric accessory 37a1) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and holding more game balls than the first guide piece is provided.
The guide piece drive unit (upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2) is
After setting the first guide piece to the open state, the first guide piece is set to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, whereby the first guide piece is set to the closed state. The first open / closed state that releases the remaining game ball held by the guide piece, and
After setting the second guide piece in the open state, the second guide piece is set in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, whereby the second guide piece is set to the closed state. It has a second open / closed state that releases the remaining game ball held by the guide piece.
The game machine is characterized in that it is set to either the first open / closed state or the second open / closed state.

According to the feature A5 of the present invention group, the game machine has a first open / closed state for opening and closing a first guide piece capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and a plurality of games flowing down the game area. Since the second open / close state is set to open / close the second guide piece that can hold the game ball and can hold more game balls than the first guide piece, the second open / close state is set. By setting the state, it is possible to insert a large number of game balls into the large winning opening as compared with the case where the first open / closed state is set. Therefore, since the player pays attention to whether or not the second guide piece opens and closes, the game machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A5 of the present invention group.
A holding means capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area is provided.
The holding means is
A holding main body (plate 50) located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece, and
A holding drive unit (plate drive unit 50a) that is set to a holding state or a non-holding state by driving the holding body unit is provided.
The holding drive unit
By setting the holding main body to the holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the holding main body to the non-holding state, the ball does not interfere with the game balls flowing down the game area. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming ball held by the holding main body portion is released in this way.

According to the feature A6 of the present invention group, the holding main body portion is located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece. Then, the holding drive unit holds a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the holding main body unit in the holding state, and flows down the game area by setting the holding main body unit in the non-holding state. The game ball held by the holding main body is released so as not to interfere with the game ball. According to this, the holding means can surely hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area on the guide piece.

Feature A7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A6 of the present invention group.
A gaming machine characterized in that when the guide piece driving unit sets the guide piece in a closed state, it is provided with a closing effect executing means (a closing effect determining process in step S2117A) that executes a predetermined effect.

According to the feature A7 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is provided with a closing effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece driving unit. Therefore, for example, After the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece driving unit, the player can be notified by executing a predetermined effect whether the state is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A7 of the present invention group.
The guide piece
When the remaining game ball is released by the guide one-side drive unit, the advantageous side holding position (the left half surface of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) leading to a path advantageous to the player, and
When the remaining game ball is released by the guide piece driving unit, the disadvantageous side holding position (the right half surface of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position. A game machine characterized by having.

According to the feature A8 of the present invention group, the guide piece driving unit sets the guide piece in the open state and then sets the guide piece in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. By doing so, the remaining game balls held by the guide piece are released. Further, the guide piece releases the remaining game ball at the guide piece drive unit and the advantageous side holding position that leads to a path that is advantageous to the player when the guide piece drive unit releases the remaining game ball. In some cases, it has a disadvantageous side holding position that leads to a route that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position. Therefore, when the player releases the remaining game ball by the guide one-side drive unit, the player pays attention to the position of the game ball, and the game machine improves the player's attention to the game. be able to.

According to the feature A group of the present invention as described above, the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, it is equipped with a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery is performed by the game ball entering the operating port (starting ball entry means). The gaming machine to run is known. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the game machine shifts from the normal control state to the game state to a specific control state which is advantageous for the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

However, since the variable winning device pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball flows down the game area, the payout of the game ball becomes monotonous, and as a result, the player's attention to the game decreases. There is a problem of doing it.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are inserted, and an internal lottery is held when the game ball is entered. It is advantageous for the player based on the results of the starting ball entry means (central operating port 36 and right operating port 37) to be executed and the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. A game state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts the game state to the specific control state (open / close execution mode), and a variable winning device (main control device 60) that shifts the game ball to a state in which the game ball can enter when the specific control state is entered. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) equipped with a variable winning device 38).
It is possible to hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and is provided with a ball entry assisting means for assisting the entry of the game balls into the variable winning device.
The ball entry assisting means
Auxiliary main body portions (electric accessory 37a, 37a3 and upper electric accessory 37a1) located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball entering the variable winning device, and
An auxiliary drive unit (electric accessory drive unit 37b and upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1) that is set to a holding state or a non-holding state by driving the auxiliary main body unit is provided.
The auxiliary drive unit
By setting the auxiliary main body to the holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the auxiliary main body to the non-holding state, the ball does not interfere with the game balls flowing down the game area. In this way, the game ball held by the auxiliary main body is released.
The variable winning device is
A large winning opening (large winning opening 38a) that pays out a predetermined game ball when entering a game ball, and
A flow of a game ball that has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter the large winning opening and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter, and has passed through the auxiliary main body portion. An opening / closing door (opening / closing door 38b) located on the downstream side of the road,
A variable winning drive unit (variable winning drive unit 38c) that is set to an open state or a closed state by driving the opening / closing door is provided.
The variable winning drive unit sets the opening / closing door to the open state, and then sets the opening / closing door to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the large winning opening.
The auxiliary main body portion is characterized in that it can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary main body portion is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. A game machine to play.

According to the feature B1 of the present invention group, the variable winning drive unit sets the opening / closing door to the open state, and then sets the opening / closing door to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the large winning opening. Since the auxiliary main body can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary main body is larger than a predetermined number of game balls, the game machine is large. It is possible to enter more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls into the winning opening, and it is possible to facilitate over-winning. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B1 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit is a gaming machine characterized in that the opening / closing door is set to an open state so that a game ball released from the auxiliary main body portion can enter the large winning opening.

According to the feature B2 of the present invention group, the variable winning drive unit sets the opening / closing door to the open state so that the game ball released from the auxiliary main body unit can enter the large winning opening. It is possible to enter more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls into the winning opening, and it is possible to facilitate over-winning.

Feature B3.
In the gaming machine described in feature B1 or feature B2 of the present invention group
The opening / closing door is a gaming machine characterized in that it is located on the vertically lower side of the auxiliary main body portion.

According to the feature B3 of the present invention group, since the opening / closing door is located on the vertically lower side of the auxiliary main body portion, the auxiliary main body portion is released from the auxiliary main body portion by setting the auxiliary main body portion in the non-holding state. The game ball will fall freely and head toward the opening / closing door. Therefore, the game machine can easily allow the game ball held by the auxiliary main body to enter the large winning opening.

Feature B4.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B1 to B3 of the present invention group.
The variable winning drive unit
A first opening time for setting the opening / closing door in an open state so that a game ball released from the auxiliary main body can enter the large winning opening.
It is provided with a second opening time for setting the opening / closing door in an open state so that the game ball released from the auxiliary main body does not enter the large winning opening.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the opening / closing door is set to an open state at any of the first opening time and the second opening time.

According to the feature B4 of the present invention group, the game machine is the first opening time in which the opening / closing door is set to the open state so that the game ball released from the auxiliary main body can enter the big winning opening, and the big winning prize. Setting the open / close door to the open state so that the ball does not enter the mouth Since the open / close door is set to the open state at any time of the second open time, the player can see the game ball released from the auxiliary main body. You will pay attention to whether or not you will enter the big winning opening. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B1 to B4 of the present invention group.
The auxiliary main body
A first auxiliary main body portion (lower electric accessory 37a2) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and
It is provided with a second auxiliary main body portion (upper electric accessory 37a1) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and holding more game balls than the first auxiliary main body portion.
The auxiliary drive unit (upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2) is
By setting the first auxiliary main body to the open state and then setting the first auxiliary main body to the closed state, the game ball held by the first auxiliary main body is released. 1 auxiliary open / closed state and
By setting the second auxiliary main body to the open state and then setting the second auxiliary main body to the closed state, the game ball held by the second auxiliary main body is released. With 2 auxiliary open / close states
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is set to either the first auxiliary opening / closing state or the second auxiliary opening / closing state.

According to the feature B5 of the present invention group, the game machine flows down the game area and the first auxiliary open / closed state that opens and closes the first auxiliary main body portion that can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area. Since it is set to one of the second auxiliary open / closed states that open / close the second auxiliary main body portion that can hold a plurality of game balls and can hold more game balls than the first auxiliary main body portion. By setting the second auxiliary opening / closing state, more game balls can be inserted into the large winning opening as compared with the case of setting the first auxiliary opening / closing state. Therefore, since the player pays attention to whether or not the second auxiliary main body opens and closes, the game machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B1 to B5 of the present invention group.
A gaming machine characterized in that when the auxiliary drive unit sets the auxiliary main body unit to a non-holding state, it is provided with a closing effect executing means (closed effect determining process in step S2117A) for executing a predetermined effect. ..

According to the feature B6 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is provided with a closing effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect when the auxiliary main body is set to the non-holding state by the auxiliary drive unit. After setting the auxiliary main body to the non-holding state in the auxiliary drive unit, it is possible to notify the player of whether the auxiliary main body is in an advantageous state or a disadvantageous state for the player by executing a predetermined effect. it can. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B1 to B6 of the present invention group.
The auxiliary main body
When the game ball is released by the auxiliary drive unit, the advantageous side holding position (the left half surface of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) leading to a path advantageous to the player
When the game ball is released by the auxiliary drive unit, it has a disadvantageous side holding position (the right half surface of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position. A game machine featuring.

According to the feature B7 of the present invention group, the auxiliary drive unit is a game ball held by the auxiliary main body portion by setting the auxiliary main body portion to the holding state and then setting the auxiliary main body portion to the non-holding state. Release. Further, the auxiliary main body portion has an advantageous side holding position that leads to a path that is advantageous to the player when the auxiliary drive unit releases the game ball, and an advantageous side when the auxiliary drive unit releases the game ball. It has a disadvantageous holding position that leads to a route that is more disadvantageous to the player than the holding position. Therefore, when the player releases the game ball at the auxiliary drive unit, the player pays attention to the position of the game ball, so that the game machine can improve the player's attention to the game. ..

According to the feature B group of the present invention as described above, the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, it is equipped with a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery is performed by the game ball entering the operating port (starting ball entry means). The gaming machine to run is known. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the game machine shifts from the normal control state to the game state to a specific control state which is advantageous for the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

However, since the variable winning device pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball flows down the game area, the payout of the game ball becomes monotonous, and as a result, the player's attention to the game decreases. There is a problem of doing it.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are inserted, and an internal lottery is held when the game ball is entered. Based on the lottery means to be executed (right operating port 37) and the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lottery means, the specific control state (open / close execution mode) advantageous to the player is set. A game including a game state transition means (main control device 60) for shifting the game state and a variable winning device (variable winning device 38) for shifting the game ball to a state in which the game ball can be entered when the specific control state is entered. It ’s a machine (pachinko machine 10),
The lottery means
A guide piece (electric) having an open state in which a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area can be held and entering the lottery means, and a closed state in which the game balls flowing down the game area are not allowed to enter the lottery means. Character 37a) and
A guide piece drive unit (electric accessory drive unit 37b) that sets the open state or the closed state by driving the guide piece is provided.
The variable winning device is
A large winning opening (large winning opening 38a) that pays out a predetermined game ball when entering a game ball, and
A flow path of a game ball that has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter the large winning opening and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter. Opening and closing door (opening and closing door 38b) located on the downstream side of
A variable winning drive unit (variable winning drive unit 38c) that is set to an open state or a closed state by driving the opening / closing door is provided.
The guide piece driving unit releases the game ball held by the guide piece by setting the guide piece in the open state and then setting the guide piece in the closed state.
The game machine
A period adjusting means (small hit in step S907A) for adjusting the relay period from setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece driving unit to setting the opening / closing door to the open state by the variable winning drive unit. A game machine characterized by having a waiting time setting process for starting).

According to the feature C1 of the present invention group, the guide piece driving unit releases the game ball held by the guide piece by setting the guide piece in the open state and then setting the guide piece in the closed state. Since the game machine is equipped with a period adjusting means for adjusting the relay period from setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit to setting the opening / closing door to the open state by the variable winning drive unit. , The relay period can be adjusted by the period adjusting means so that the game ball released from the guide piece enters the large winning opening. According to this, the player pays attention to the relay period from setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit to setting the opening / closing door to the open state by the variable winning drive unit. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C1 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit
A first opening time for setting the opening / closing door in an open state so that a game ball released from the guide piece can enter the large winning opening.
It is provided with a second opening time for setting the opening / closing door in an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece does not enter the large winning opening.
The period adjusting means is characterized in that the relay period is adjusted by setting the opening / closing door to an open state at any of the first opening time and the second opening time. ..

According to the feature C2 of the present invention group, the period adjusting means sets the opening / closing door in the open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece enters the big winning opening, and the big winning. Set the opening / closing door to the open state so that the ball does not enter the mouth Since the opening / closing door is set to the open state at any time of the second opening time, the player can play a large game ball released from the guide piece. You will pay attention to whether or not you will enter the winning opening. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C1 or the feature C2 of the present invention group
The opening / closing door is a gaming machine characterized in that it is located on the vertically lower side of the guide piece.

According to the feature C3 of the present invention group, since the opening / closing door is located on the vertically lower side of the guide piece, the game ball released from the guide piece by setting the guide piece in the closed state by the guide piece driving unit. Will fall freely and head towards the open / close door. Therefore, the game machine can easily allow the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces to enter the large winning opening.

Feature C4.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C3 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit
After setting the opening / closing door to the open state, the opening / closing door is set to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the large winning opening.
The guide piece is characterized in that it can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. Machine.

According to the feature C4 of the present invention group, the variable winning drive unit sets the opening / closing door to the open state, and then sets the opening / closing door to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the large winning opening. , The guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than a predetermined number of game balls. It is possible to enter more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls into the door, and it is possible to easily over-win. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C4 of the present invention group.
A holding means capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area is provided.
The holding means is
A holding main body (plate 50) located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece, and
A holding drive unit (plate drive unit 50a) that is set to a holding state or a non-holding state by driving the holding body unit is provided.
The holding drive unit
By setting the holding main body to the holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the holding main body to the non-holding state, the ball does not interfere with the game balls flowing down the game area. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming ball held by the holding main body portion is released in this way.

According to the feature C5 of the present invention group, the holding main body portion is located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece. Then, the holding drive unit holds a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the holding main body unit in the holding state, and flows down the game area by setting the holding main body unit in the non-holding state. The game ball held by the holding main body is released so as not to interfere with the game ball. According to this, the holding means can surely hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area on the guide piece.

Feature C6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C5 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the guide piece driving unit sets the guide piece in a closed state, it is provided with a closing effect executing means (a closing effect determining process in step S2117A) that executes a predetermined effect.

According to the feature C6 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is provided with a closing effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece driving unit. Therefore, for example, After the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece driving unit, the player can be notified by executing a predetermined effect whether the state is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C6 of the present invention group,
The guide piece
When the game ball is released by the guide one-side drive unit, the advantageous side holding position (the left half surface of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) leading to a path advantageous to the player, and
When the game ball is released by the guide one-side drive unit, it has a disadvantageous side holding position (right half surface of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position. A game machine characterized by that.

According to the feature C7 of the present invention group, the guide piece driving unit releases the game ball held by the guide piece by setting the guide piece in the open state and then setting the guide piece in the closed state. .. Further, the guide piece is advantageous when the guide piece driving unit releases the game ball, the advantageous side holding position which leads to a path advantageous to the player, and when the guide piece driving unit releases the game ball. It has a disadvantageous side holding position that leads to a route that is more disadvantageous to the player than the side holding position. Therefore, when the player releases the game ball with the guide one-side drive unit, the player pays attention to the position of the game ball, so that the game machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game. it can.

According to the feature C group of the present invention as described above, the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, it is equipped with a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery is performed by the game ball entering the operating port (starting ball entry means). The gaming machine to run is known. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the game machine shifts from the normal control state to the game state to a specific control state which is advantageous for the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

However, since the variable winning device pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball flows down the game area, the payout of the game ball becomes monotonous, and as a result, the player's attention to the game decreases. There is a problem of doing it.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are inserted, and an internal lottery is held when the game ball is entered. Based on the lottery means to be executed (right operating port 37) and the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lottery means, the specific control state (open / close execution mode) advantageous to the player is set. A game including a game state transition means (main control device 60) for shifting the game state and a variable winning device (variable winning device 38) for shifting the game ball to a state in which the game ball can be entered when the specific control state is entered. It ’s a machine (pachinko machine 10),
The lottery means
A guide piece (upper side) having an open state in which a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area can be held and entering the lottery means, and a closed state in which the game balls flowing down the game area are not allowed to enter the lottery means. Electric accessory 37a1 and lower electric accessory 37a2),
A guide piece drive unit (upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2) that is set to an open state or a closed state by driving the guide piece is provided.
The variable winning device is
A large winning opening (large winning opening 38a) that pays out a predetermined game ball when entering a game ball, and
A flow path of a game ball that has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter the large winning opening and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter. Opening and closing door (opening and closing door 38b) located on the downstream side of
A variable winning drive unit (variable winning drive unit 38c) that is set to an open state or a closed state by driving the opening / closing door is provided.
The guide piece driving unit releases the game ball held by the guide piece by setting the guide piece in the open state and then setting the guide piece in the closed state.
The game machine
A game machine comprising a holding amount adjusting means (processing for electric service support in step S306B) for adjusting the amount of holding the game ball with the guide piece.

According to the feature D1 of the present invention group, the guide piece driving unit releases the game ball held by the guide piece by setting the guide piece in the open state and then setting the guide piece in the closed state. Since the game machine is provided with a holding amount adjusting means for adjusting the holding amount of the game ball, by adjusting the holding amount adjusting means so as to increase the holding amount of the game ball, a large winning opening can be obtained. It is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D1 of the present invention group,
A guide piece lottery means (process of step S1301) for executing a lottery for whether or not to set the guide piece in the open state is provided.
The holding amount adjusting means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the amount of a game ball held by the guide piece is adjusted based on the lottery result of the guide piece lottery means.

According to the feature D2 of the present invention group, the holding amount adjusting means adjusts the amount of holding the game ball by the guide piece based on the lottery result of the guide piece lottery means, so that the player can adjust the amount of the game ball to be held by the guide piece lottery means. We will pay attention to the lottery result. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D1 or the feature D2 of the present invention group
The guide piece
A first guide piece (lower electric accessory 37a2) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and
A second guide piece (upper electric accessory 37a1) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and holding more game balls than the first guide piece is provided.
The guide piece drive unit (upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2) is
The first opening and closing that releases the game ball held by the first guide piece by setting the first guide piece in the open state and then setting the first guide piece in the closed state. State and
A second opening / closing that releases the game ball held by the second guide piece by setting the second guide piece in the open state and then setting the second guide piece in the closed state. With state
The holding amount adjusting means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is set to either the first open / closed state or the second open / closed state.

According to the feature D3 of the present invention group, the holding amount adjusting means flows down the game area and the first open / closed state of opening and closing the first guide piece capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area. Since it is set to one of the second open / closed states in which the second guide piece that can hold a plurality of game balls and can hold more game balls than the first guide piece is set, the second By setting the open / closed state of, a large number of game balls can be inserted into the large winning opening as compared with the case of setting the first open / closed state. Therefore, since the player pays attention to whether or not the second guide piece opens and closes, the game machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D4.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features D1 to D3 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit
A game machine characterized in that the opening / closing door is set to an open state so that a game ball released from the guide piece can enter the large winning opening.

According to the feature D4 of the present invention group, the variable winning drive unit sets the opening / closing door to the open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece can enter the big winning opening, so that the game machine wins the big winning. A game ball can be surely put into the mouth.

Feature D5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features D1 to D4 of the present invention group,
The opening / closing door is a gaming machine characterized in that it is located on the vertically lower side of the guide piece.

According to the feature D5 of the present invention group, since the opening / closing door is located on the vertically lower side of the guide piece, the game ball released from the guide piece by setting the guide piece in the closed state by the guide piece driving unit. Will fall freely and head towards the open / close door. Therefore, the game machine can easily allow the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces to enter the large winning opening.

Feature D6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features D1 to D5 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit
After setting the opening / closing door to the open state, the opening / closing door is set to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the large winning opening.
The guide piece is characterized in that it can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. Machine.

According to the feature D6 of the present invention group, the variable winning drive unit sets the opening / closing door to the open state, and then sets the opening / closing door to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the large winning opening. , The guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than a predetermined number of game balls. It is possible to enter more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls into the door, and it is possible to easily over-win. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features D1 to D6 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit
A first opening time for setting the opening / closing door in an open state so that a game ball released from the guide piece can enter the large winning opening.
It is provided with a second opening time for setting the opening / closing door in an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece does not enter the large winning opening.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the opening / closing door is set to an open state at any of the first opening time and the second opening time.

According to the feature D7 of the present invention group, the game machine has a first opening time for setting the opening / closing door to be in an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece can enter the big winning opening, and the big winning opening. The opening / closing door is set to the open state so as not to enter the ball. Since the opening / closing door is set to the open state at any time of the second opening time, the player can win a big prize for the game ball released from the guide piece. You will pay attention to whether or not the ball enters the mouth. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features D1 to D7 of the present invention group,
A holding means capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area is provided.
The holding means is
A holding main body (plate 50) located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece, and
A holding drive unit (plate drive unit 50a) that is set to a holding state or a non-holding state by driving the holding body unit is provided.
The holding drive unit
By setting the holding main body to the holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the holding main body to the non-holding state, the ball does not interfere with the game balls flowing down the game area. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming ball held by the holding main body portion is released in this way.

According to the feature D8 of the present invention group, the holding main body portion is located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece. Then, the holding drive unit holds a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the holding main body unit in the holding state, and flows down the game area by setting the holding main body unit in the non-holding state. The game ball held by the holding main body can be released so as not to interfere with the game ball. According to this, the holding means can surely hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area on the guide piece.

Feature D9.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features D1 to D8 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the guide piece driving unit sets the guide piece in a closed state, it is provided with a closing effect executing means (a closing effect determining process in step S2117A) that executes a predetermined effect.

According to the feature D9 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is provided with a closing effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece driving unit. Therefore, for example, After the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece driving unit, the player can be notified by executing a predetermined effect whether the state is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D10.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features D1 to D9 of the present invention group,
The guide piece
When the game ball is released by the guide one-side drive unit, the advantageous side holding position (the left half surface of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) leading to a path advantageous to the player, and
When the game ball is released by the guide one-side drive unit, it has a disadvantageous side holding position (right half surface of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position. A game machine characterized by that.

According to the feature D10 of the present invention group, the guide piece driving unit releases the game ball held by the guide piece by setting the guide piece in the open state and then setting the guide piece in the closed state. .. Further, the guide piece is advantageous when the guide piece driving unit releases the game ball, the advantageous side holding position which leads to a path advantageous to the player, and when the guide piece driving unit releases the game ball. It has a disadvantageous side holding position that leads to a route that is more disadvantageous to the player than the side holding position. Therefore, when the player releases the game ball with the guide one-side drive unit, the player pays attention to the position of the game ball, so that the game machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game. it can.

According to the feature D group of the present invention as described above, the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, it is equipped with a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery is performed by the game ball entering the operating port (starting ball entry means). The gaming machine to run is known. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the game machine shifts from the normal control state to the game state to a specific control state which is advantageous for the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

However, since the variable winning device pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball flows down the game area, the payout of the game ball becomes monotonous, and as a result, the player's attention to the game decreases. There is a problem of doing it.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are inserted, and an internal lottery is held when the game ball is entered. It is advantageous for the player based on the results of the starting ball entry means (central operating port 36 and right operating port 37) to be executed and the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. A game state transition means (main control device 60) that shifts the game state to the specific control state (open / close execution mode), and a variable winning device (main control device 60) that shifts the game ball to a state in which the game ball can enter when the specific control state is entered. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) equipped with a variable winning device 38).
A holding means capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area is provided.
The holding means is
Holding body (plate 50) and
A holding drive unit (plate drive unit 50a) that is set to a holding state or a non-holding state by driving the holding body unit is provided.
The holding drive unit
By setting the holding main body to the holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the holding main body to the non-holding state, the ball does not interfere with the game balls flowing down the game area. In this way, the game ball held by the holding main body is released.
The variable winning device is
A large winning opening (large winning opening 38a) that pays out a predetermined game ball when entering a game ball, and
A flow of a game ball that has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter the large winning opening and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter, and has passed through the holding body portion. An opening / closing door (opening / closing door 38b) located on the downstream side of the road,
A gaming machine including a variable winning drive unit (variable winning drive unit 38c) that is set to an open state or a closed state by driving the opening / closing door.

According to the feature E1 of the present invention group, the opening / closing door of the variable winning device is located on the downstream side of the flow path of the game ball that has passed through the holding main body. Then, the holding drive unit holds a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the holding main body unit in the holding state, and flows down the game area by setting the holding main body unit in the non-holding state. The game ball held by the holding main body is released so as not to interfere with the game ball. According to this, the holding means can make it easy for a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area to enter the large winning opening.

Feature E2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E1 of the present invention group
The holding drive unit is a gaming machine characterized in that by driving the holding main body unit, the holding drive unit is set to vibrate in a simple manner so as to repeat a holding state and a non-holding state.

According to the feature E2 of the present invention group, the holding drive unit is set to make a simple vibration by repeating the holding state and the non-holding state by driving the holding main body part. The configuration of can be simplified.

Feature E3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E1 or the feature E2 of the present invention group
The opening / closing door is a gaming machine characterized in that it is located on the vertically lower side of the holding main body portion.

According to the feature E3 of the present invention group, since the opening / closing door is located on the vertically lower side of the holding main body, the holding main body is released from the holding main body by setting the holding main body to the non-holding state by the holding drive unit. The game ball will fall freely and head toward the opening / closing door. Therefore, the game machine can easily allow the game ball held by the holding main body to enter the large winning opening.

Feature E4.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features E1 to E3 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit
After setting the opening / closing door to the open state, the opening / closing door is set to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the large winning opening.
The holding main body portion is characterized in that it can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the holding main body portion is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. A game machine to play.

According to the feature E4 of the present invention group, the variable winning drive unit sets the opening / closing door to the open state, and then sets the opening / closing door to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the large winning opening. Since the holding main body can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the holding main body is larger than a predetermined number of game balls, the game machine is large. It is possible to make it easier to enter more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls into the winning opening, and it is possible to make it easier to make over-winning. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to the feature E group of the present invention as described above, the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, it is equipped with a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery is performed by the game ball entering the operating port (starting ball entry means). The gaming machine to run is known. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the game machine shifts from the normal control state to the game state to a specific control state which is advantageous for the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

However, since the variable winning device pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball flows down the game area, the payout of the game ball becomes monotonous, and as a result, the player's attention to the game decreases. There is a problem of doing it.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are inserted, and an internal lottery is held when the game ball is entered. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) provided with a lottery means (right operating port 37) to be executed.
The lottery means
A guide piece (electric accessory) having an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be held and entering the lottery means, and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter the lottery means. 37a, 37a3, upper electric accessory 37a1, and lower electric accessory 37a2),
A guide piece drive unit (electric accessory drive unit 37b, upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1, and lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2) that is set to an open state or a closed state by driving the guide piece is provided. ,
The gaming machine is characterized by including a closing effect executing means (closed effect determining process in step S2117A) that executes a predetermined effect when the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece driving unit. A game machine to be.

According to the feature F1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is provided with a closing effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece driving unit. Therefore, for example, After the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece driving unit, the player can be notified by executing a predetermined effect whether the state is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F1 of the present invention group,
The closing effect executing means sets the guide piece in the closed state by the guide piece driving unit, so that the player becomes advantageous to the player when the guide piece becomes advantageous to the player. When the advantageous state notification effect (high expectation degree effect) is executed and the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece driving unit, the player is in a disadvantageous state. A gaming machine characterized by executing a disadvantageous state notification effect (low expectation effect) that notifies the player of a disadvantageous state.

According to the feature F2 of the present invention group, the closing effect executing means is advantageous to the player when the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece driving unit, which is advantageous to the player. It is disadvantageous for the player when the player is in a disadvantageous state by executing the advantageous state notification effect of notifying the player of the state and setting the guide piece in the closed state by the guide piece driving unit. Since the disadvantageous state notification effect for notifying the player of the situation is executed, the player pays attention to the predetermined effect executed by the closing effect executing means.

Feature F3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F2 of the present invention group,
A game state transition means (main control) that shifts the game state to a specific control state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lottery means. Device 60) and
A variable winning device (variable winning device 38) that shifts to a state in which a game ball can be entered when the specific control state is entered is provided.
The guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area.
The variable winning device is
A large winning opening (large winning opening 38a) that pays out a predetermined game ball when entering a game ball, and
A flow path of a game ball that has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter the large winning opening and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter. Opening and closing door (opening and closing door 38b) located on the downstream side of
A variable winning drive unit (variable winning drive unit 38c) that is set to an open state or a closed state by driving the opening / closing door is provided.
The guide piece driving unit sets the guide piece in the open state and then sets the guide piece in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. Release the remaining game balls held at
The variable winning drive unit
The opening / closing door is set to the open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece can enter the large winning opening.
When the closing effect executing means is expected to allow more game balls than a predetermined number to enter the large winning opening by setting the guide piece in the closed state by the guide piece driving unit. When the degree of expectation that more game balls than a predetermined number are entered into the large winning opening is low by executing the advantageous state notification effect and setting the guide piece in the closed state by the guide piece driving unit. A game machine characterized by executing a disadvantageous state notification effect.

According to the feature F3 of the present invention group, the guide piece driving unit sets the guide piece in the open state and then sets the guide piece in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. By doing so, the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces are released, and the variable winning drive unit sets the opening / closing door to the open state so that the game balls released from the guide pieces can enter the large winning opening. To do. In other words, the variable winning drive unit sets the open / close door to the open state at the timing when the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit. According to this, the game machine can put the remaining game ball held by the guide piece into the large winning opening, and can pay out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters. .. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

In addition, the closing effect executing means is advantageous when it is highly expected that more game balls than a predetermined number will be entered into the large winning opening by setting the guide piece in the closed state by the guide piece driving unit. By executing the notification effect and setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, the disadvantageous state notification effect is produced when the expectation that more game balls than the predetermined number are entered into the large winning opening is low. Since it is executed, the player pays attention to a predetermined effect executed by the effect execution means at the time of closing.

Feature F4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F3 of the present invention group,
The opening / closing door is a gaming machine characterized in that it is located on the vertically lower side of the guide piece.

According to the feature F4 of the present invention group, since the opening / closing door is located on the vertically lower side of the guide piece, the game ball released from the guide piece by setting the guide piece in the closed state by the guide piece driving unit. Will fall freely and head towards the open / close door. Therefore, the game machine can easily allow the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces to enter the large winning opening.

Feature F5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F3 or the feature F4 of the present invention group
The variable winning drive unit
After setting the opening / closing door to the open state, the opening / closing door is set to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the large winning opening.
The guide piece is characterized in that it can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. Machine.

According to the feature F5 of the present invention group, the variable winning drive unit sets the opening / closing door to the open state, and then sets the opening / closing door to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the large winning opening. , The guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than a predetermined number of game balls. It is possible to enter more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls into the door, and it is possible to easily over-win. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features F3 to F5 of the present invention group.
The variable winning drive unit
A first opening time for setting the opening / closing door in an open state so that a game ball released from the guide piece can enter the large winning opening.
It is provided with a second opening time for setting the opening / closing door in an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece does not enter the large winning opening.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the opening / closing door is set to an open state at any of the first opening time and the second opening time.

According to the feature F6 of the present invention group, the game machine has a first opening time for setting the opening / closing door in an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece can enter the big winning opening, and the big winning opening. The opening / closing door is set to the open state so as not to enter the ball. Since the opening / closing door is set to the open state at any time of the second opening time, the player can win a big prize for the game ball released from the guide piece. You will pay attention to whether or not the ball enters the mouth. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features F3 to F6 of the present invention group,
The guide piece
A first guide piece (lower electric accessory 37a2) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and
A second guide piece (upper electric accessory 37a1) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and holding more game balls than the first guide piece is provided.
The guide piece drive unit (upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2) is
After setting the first guide piece to the open state, the first guide piece is set to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, whereby the first guide piece is set to the closed state. The first open / closed state that releases the remaining game ball held by the guide piece, and
After setting the second guide piece in the open state, the second guide piece is set in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, whereby the second guide piece is set to the closed state. It has a second open / closed state that releases the remaining game ball held by the guide piece.
The game machine is characterized in that it is set to either the first open / closed state or the second open / closed state.

According to the feature F7 of the present invention group, the game machine has a first open / closed state for opening and closing a first guide piece capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and a plurality of games flowing down the game area. Since the second open / close state is set to open / close the second guide piece that can hold the game ball and can hold more game balls than the first guide piece, the second open / close state is set. By setting the state, it is possible to insert a large number of game balls into the large winning opening as compared with the case where the first open / closed state is set. Therefore, since the player pays attention to whether or not the second guide piece opens and closes, the game machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features F3 to F7 of the present invention group.
A holding means capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area is provided.
The holding means is
A holding main body (plate 50) located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece, and
A holding drive unit (plate drive unit 50a) that is set to a holding state or a non-holding state by driving the holding body unit is provided.
The holding drive unit
By setting the holding main body to the holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the holding main body to the non-holding state, the ball does not interfere with the game balls flowing down the game area. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming ball held by the holding main body portion is released in this way.

According to the feature F8 of the present invention group, the holding main body portion is located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece. Then, the holding drive unit holds a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the holding main body unit in the holding state, and flows down the game area by setting the holding main body unit in the non-holding state. The game ball held by the holding main body is released so as not to interfere with the game ball. According to this, the holding means can surely hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area on the guide piece.

Feature F9.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features F1 to F8 of the present invention group.
The guide piece
When the game ball is released by the guide one-side drive unit, the advantageous side holding position (the left half surface of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) leading to a path advantageous to the player, and
When the game ball is released by the guide one-side drive unit, it has a disadvantageous side holding position (right half surface of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position. A game machine characterized by that.

According to the feature F9 of the present invention group, the guide piece driving unit releases the game ball held by the guide piece by setting the guide piece in the open state and then setting the guide piece in the closed state. .. Further, the guide piece is advantageous when the guide piece driving unit releases the game ball, the advantageous side holding position which leads to a path advantageous to the player, and when the guide piece driving unit releases the game ball. It has a disadvantageous side holding position that leads to a route that is more disadvantageous to the player than the side holding position. Therefore, when the player releases the game ball with the guide one-side drive unit, the player pays attention to the position of the game ball, so that the game machine can improve the degree of attention of the player to the game. it can.

According to the feature F group of the present invention as described above, the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, it is equipped with a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by the game ball entering the operating port (starting ball entry means). The gaming machine to run is known. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the game machine shifts from the normal control state to the game state to a specific control state which is advantageous for the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
By the way, as a kind of such an operating port, an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be held and the ball enters the operating port, and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter the operating port. A working port including a guide piece to be held and a guide piece driving unit for setting an open state or a closed state by driving the guide piece is known.

However, since the guide piece is monotonically set in the open state or the closed state by the guide piece driving unit, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are inserted, and an internal lottery is held when the game ball is entered. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) provided with a lottery means (right operating port 37) to be executed.
The lottery means
A guide piece (electric) having an open state in which a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area can be held and entering the lottery means, and a closed state in which the game balls flowing down the game area are not allowed to enter the lottery means. The accessory 37a, 37a3, the upper electric accessory 37a1, and the lower electric accessory 37a2),
A guide piece drive unit (electric accessory drive unit 37b, upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1, and lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2) that is set to an open state or a closed state by driving the guide piece is provided. ,
The guide piece driving unit sets the guide piece in the open state and then sets the guide piece in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. Release the remaining game balls held at
The guide piece
When the remaining game ball is released by the guide one-side drive unit, the advantageous side holding position (the left half surface of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) leading to a path advantageous to the player, and
When the remaining game ball is released by the guide piece driving unit, the disadvantageous side holding position (the right half surface of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position. A game machine characterized by having.

According to the feature G1 of the present invention group, the guide piece driving unit sets the guide piece in the open state and then sets the guide piece in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. By doing so, the remaining game balls held by the guide piece are released. Further, the guide piece releases the remaining game ball at the guide piece drive unit and the advantageous side holding position that leads to a path that is advantageous to the player when the guide piece drive unit releases the remaining game ball. In some cases, it has a disadvantageous side holding position that leads to a route that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position. Therefore, when the player releases the remaining game ball by the guide one-side drive unit, the player pays attention to the position of the game ball, and the game machine improves the player's attention to the game. be able to.

Feature G2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G1 of the present invention group,
The advantageous side holding position leads to a route that is advantageous to the player by entering the winning opening that pays out a predetermined number of game balls when the game ball enters, and the disadvantaged side holding position is the game ball. A gaming machine characterized in that a player is guided to a route that is disadvantageous to a player by entering a winning opening that pays out a smaller number of gaming balls than a predetermined number of gaming balls.

According to the feature G2 of the present invention group, the advantageous side holding position leads to a route that is advantageous to the player by entering the winning opening that pays out a predetermined number of game balls when the game ball enters, which is disadvantageous. Since the side holding position leads to a route that is disadvantageous to the player by entering the winning opening that pays out a smaller number of game balls than a predetermined number when the game ball enters, the player can use the player. When the remaining game balls are released by the guide one-side drive unit, the position of the game balls will be further paid attention to.

Feature G3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G2 of the present invention group,
A game state transition means (main control) that shifts the game state to a specific control state (open / close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lottery means. Device 60) and
A variable winning device (variable winning device 38) that shifts to a state in which a game ball can be entered when the specific control state is entered is provided.
The variable winning device is
A large winning opening (large winning opening 38a) that pays out a predetermined game ball when entering a game ball, and
A flow path of a game ball that has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter the large winning opening and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter. Opening and closing door (opening and closing door 38b) located on the downstream side of
A variable winning drive unit (variable winning drive unit 38c) that is set to an open state or a closed state by driving the opening / closing door is provided.
The guide piece
When the remaining game ball is released by the guide one-side drive unit, the disadvantageous side holding position that leads to the path for entering the ball into the large winning opening, and
When the guide piece driving unit releases the remaining game ball, it has the advantageous side holding position that leads to a path for entering the ball into a winning opening (general winning opening 35D) different from the large winning opening.
The variable winning drive unit
A game machine characterized in that the opening / closing door is set to an open state so that a game ball at a disadvantaged side holding position released from the guide piece is allowed to enter the large winning opening.

According to the feature G3 of the present invention group, the variable winning drive unit sets the opening / closing door to the open state so that the game ball at the disadvantage side holding position released from the guide piece can enter the large winning opening. In other words, the variable winning drive unit sets the open / close door to the open state at the timing when the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit. According to this, the game machine can put the game ball in the disadvantaged side holding position out of the remaining game balls held by the guide piece into the large winning opening, and when the game ball enters the ball. A predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, since the guide piece has an advantageous side holding position that guides the ball to the winning hole different from the large winning opening when the remaining game ball is released by the guide piece driving unit, the game machine Can put the game ball in the advantageous side holding position into a winning opening different from the large winning opening among the remaining game balls held by the guide piece, and a predetermined number of balls are entered at the time of entering this game ball. You can pay out more game balls than the game balls of. Therefore, the player pays more attention to the position of the remaining game ball when the guide one-side drive unit releases the remaining game ball.

Feature G4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G3 of the present invention group,
The opening / closing door is a gaming machine characterized in that it is located on the vertically lower side of the guide piece.

According to the feature G4 of the present invention group, since the opening / closing door is located on the vertically lower side of the guide piece, the game ball released from the guide piece by setting the guide piece in the closed state by the guide piece driving unit. Will fall freely and head towards the open / close door. Therefore, the game machine can easily allow the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces to enter the large winning opening.

Feature G5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G3 or the feature G4 of the present invention group
The variable winning drive unit
After setting the opening / closing door to the open state, the opening / closing door is set to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the large winning opening.
The guide piece is characterized in that it can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. Machine.

According to the feature G5 of the present invention group, the variable winning drive unit sets the opening / closing door to the open state, and then sets the opening / closing door to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the large winning opening. , The guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than a predetermined number of game balls. It is possible to enter more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls into the door, and it is possible to easily over-win. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature G6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features G3 to G5 of the present invention group.
The variable winning drive unit
A first opening time for setting the opening / closing door in an open state so that a game ball released from the guide piece can enter the large winning opening.
It is provided with a second opening time for setting the opening / closing door in an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece does not enter the large winning opening.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the opening / closing door is set to an open state at any of the first opening time and the second opening time.

According to the feature G6 of the present invention group, the game machine has a first opening time for setting the opening / closing door in an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece can enter the big winning opening, and the big winning opening. The opening / closing door is set to the open state so as not to enter the ball. Since the opening / closing door is set to the open state at any time of the second opening time, the player can win a big prize for the game ball released from the guide piece. You will pay attention to whether or not the ball enters the mouth. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature G7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features G3 to G6 of the present invention group.
The guide piece
A first guide piece (lower electric accessory 37a2) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and
A second guide piece (upper electric accessory 37a1) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and holding more game balls than the first guide piece is provided.
The guide piece drive unit (upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2) is
After setting the first guide piece to the open state, the first guide piece is set to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, whereby the first guide piece is set to the closed state. The first open / closed state that releases the remaining game ball held by the guide piece, and
After setting the second guide piece in the open state, the second guide piece is set in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, whereby the second guide piece is set to the closed state. It has a second open / closed state that releases the remaining game ball held by the guide piece.
The game machine is characterized in that it is set to either the first open / closed state or the second open / closed state.

According to the feature G7 of the present invention group, the game machine has a first open / closed state for opening and closing a first guide piece capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and a plurality of games flowing down the game area. Since the second open / close state is set to open / close the second guide piece that can hold the game ball and can hold more game balls than the first guide piece, the second open / close state is set. By setting the state, it is possible to insert a large number of game balls into the large winning opening as compared with the case where the first open / closed state is set. Therefore, since the player pays attention to whether or not the second guide piece opens and closes, the game machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature G8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features G3 to G7 of the present invention group,
A holding means capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area is provided.
The holding means is
A holding main body (plate 50) located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece, and
A holding drive unit (plate drive unit 50a) that is set to a holding state or a non-holding state by driving the holding body unit is provided.
The holding drive unit
By setting the holding main body to the holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the holding main body to the non-holding state, the ball does not interfere with the game balls flowing down the game area. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming ball held by the holding main body portion is released in this way.

According to the feature G8 of the present invention group, the holding main body portion is located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece. Then, the holding drive unit holds a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the holding main body unit in the holding state, and flows down the game area by setting the holding main body unit in the non-holding state. The game ball held by the holding main body is released so as not to interfere with the game ball. According to this, the holding means can surely hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area on the guide piece.

Feature G9.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features G1 to G8 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the guide piece driving unit sets the guide piece in a closed state, it is provided with a closing effect executing means (a closing effect determining process in step S2117A) that executes a predetermined effect.

According to the feature G9 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is provided with a closing effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece driving unit. Therefore, for example, After the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece driving unit, the player can be notified by executing a predetermined effect whether the state is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to the feature G group of the present invention as described above, the degree of attention of the player to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, it is equipped with a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by the game ball entering the operating port (starting ball entry means). The gaming machine to run is known. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the game machine shifts from the normal control state to the game state to a specific control state which is advantageous for the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
By the way, as a kind of such an operating port, an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be held and the ball enters the operating port, and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter the operating port. A working port including a guide piece to be held and a guide piece driving unit for setting an open state or a closed state by driving the guide piece is known.

However, since the guide piece is monotonically set in the open state or the closed state by the guide piece driving unit, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.

As described above, the present invention can be suitably used for gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 35 ... General winning opening, 36 ... Upper operating port, 37 ... Lower operating port, 38 ... Variable winning device, 38a ... Large winning opening, 38b ... Opening and closing door, 38c ... Variable winning drive unit, 39 ... Out Mouth, 47 ... symbol display device, 60 ... main control device, 62 ... MPU, 90 ... voice emission control device, 92 ... MPU, 100 ... display control device, 102 ... MPU.

Claims (1)

A launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and a lottery means for inserting a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the lottery means, the game state transition means for shifting the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player, and the specific control state. It is a game machine equipped with a variable winning device that shifts to a state in which the game ball can be entered when the transition is made.
The lottery means
A guide piece having an open state in which a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area can be held and entering the lottery means, and a closed state in which the game balls flowing down the game area are not allowed to enter the lottery means.
A guide piece driving unit for setting an open state or a closed state by driving the guide piece is provided.
The variable winning device is
A large winning opening that pays out a predetermined game ball when entering a game ball,
A flow path of a game ball that has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter the large winning opening and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter. The opening and closing door located on the downstream side of
It is provided with a variable winning drive unit that is set to an open state or a closed state by driving the opening / closing door.
The guide piece driving unit releases the game ball held by the guide piece by setting the guide piece in the open state and then setting the guide piece in the closed state.
The game machine
A game machine comprising a holding amount adjusting means for adjusting the amount of holding the game ball with the guide piece.

Images